Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 226

COMAND

Operating Instructions
COMAND Operating Instructions

É1905840501$ËÍ
1905840501

Order no. 6515 7965 13 Part no. 190 584 05 01 Edition A-2016
Symbols Publication details
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- Internet
lowing symbols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
on the following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
H Environmental note only)
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. Editorial office

! Notes on material damage alert you to You are welcome to forward any queries or
dangers that could lead to damage to your suggestions you may have regarding this
vehicle. Operator's Manual to the technical documen-
tation team at the following address:
i Practical tips or further information that Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
could be helpful to you.
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
X This symbol indicates an instruction ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
that must be followed. or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
X Several of these symbols in succes- without written permission from Daimler AG.
sion indicate an instruction with sev-
eral steps.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can Vehicle manufacturer
page) find more information about a topic.
Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the Daimler AG
play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Mercedesstraße 137
play. 70327 Stuttgart
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro- Germany
tected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
reserved.

As at 25.11.2014
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
First, familiarize yourself with your COMAND
system. Read these operating instructions,
particularly the safety and warning notes,
before you drive off.
This will help you to obtain the maximum
pleasure from your COMAND system and to
avoid endangering yourself and others.
The equipment level and functions of your
COMAND system may differ depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
if you have further questions.
The Operator's Manual and all supplements
are integral parts of the vehicle. You should
always keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to
the new owner if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company

1905840501 É1905840501$ËÍ
Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 Overview and operation ..................... 19

Introduction ......................................... 14 System settings .................................. 37

Vehicle functions ................................ 49

Navigation ........................................... 57

Telephone .......................................... 111

Online and Internet functions .......... 147

Radio .................................................. 167

Media ................................................. 179

Sound ................................................. 209

SIRIUS Weather ................................ 215


4 Index

A Adjusting the volume


COMAND ......................................... 30
Access data of the mobile phone Media source ................................... 30
network provider Traffic announcements .................... 30
Deleting ......................................... 152 Alternative Route ................................ 88
Editing ........................................... 152 Asterisk key
Making entries ............................... 151 see Favorites button
Selecting ........................................ 150 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Acoustic locking confirmation
Activating ....................................... 184
Activating/deactivating
Bluetooth® audio mode ................. 194
(COMAND) ....................................... 50
Connecting USB devices ................ 184
Activating media mode
Data media, file systems, formats .. 181
General notes ................................ 180
Switching on automatically ............ 181 Gracenote® Media Database ......... 187
Adding bookmarks ............................ 162 Inserting/removing a CD/DVD
Address (single drive) .................................. 183
Media interface .............................. 200
Entering (navigation) ........................ 64
Address book Media Register ............................... 190
Media search ................................. 187
Adding a new contact .................... 128
Overview menu .............................. 183
Adding information to a contact .... 129
Playback options ........................... 185
Automatically importing contacts
SD memory card ............................ 184
from the phone .............................. 132
Search menu ................................. 186
Browsing ........................................ 127
Selecting a track ............................ 186
Calling up ....................................... 127
Automatic folding mirror function
Changing the category of an entry .. 130
Activating/deactivating
Changing the display and sorting
(COMAND) ....................................... 51
criteria for contacts ....................... 131
Automatic locking feature
Deleting contacts ........................... 132
Activating/deactivating
Deleting imported contacts ........... 134
(COMAND) ....................................... 51
Displaying contact details .............. 129
Automatic time
Editing a contact ............................ 130
Switching on/off .............................. 39
Entering characters ......................... 32
Automatic volume adjustment
Importing contacts ........................ 132
General information ......................... 44
Introduction ................................... 127
Switching on/off .............................. 45
Making a call ................................. 129
Avoiding an area ................................ 102
Receiving vCards ........................... 133
Saving a contact ............................ 132
Searching for a contact ................. 128 B
Sending e-mails ............................. 130 Back button ......................................... 23
Sending text messages .................. 130 Bluetooth®
Starting route guidance ................. 129 Activating audio mode ................... 198
Storing a phone number as a Activating/deactivating ................... 44
speed dial number ......................... 131 Audio device mode and searching
Voice tags ...................................... 131 for mobile phones .......................... 197
Address entry menu Basic display (audio mode) ............ 198
Navigation ........................................ 63 Connecting another mobile
Adjusting the sound settings phone ............................................ 117
Balance .......................................... 210 Connecting audio devices .............. 194
Index 5

De-authorizing (de-registering) a Car pool lanes ...................................... 62


device ............................................ 198 Category list (music search) ............ 188
Device list ...................................... 195 CD
Displaying connection details ........ 118 Inserting ........................................ 183
Displaying details ........................... 197 Notes on discs ............................... 183
Entering the passcode ................... 116 Characters
External authorization (audio Entering (navigation) ........................ 33
device) ........................................... 196 Climate control
General information ......................... 44 Calling up climate control
Increasing the volume using (COMAND) ....................................... 53
COMAND ....................................... 200 Calling up the climate control bar
Interface ........................................ 112 (COMAND) ....................................... 53
Introduction ................................... 112 COMAND ......................................... 52
Reconnecting an audio device ....... 197 Cooling with air dehumidification
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 115 (COMAND) ....................................... 54
Selecting a playback option ........... 199 Overview .......................................... 52
Selecting a track ............................ 199 Setting the air distribution
Starting and stopping playback ..... 198 (COMAND) ....................................... 53
Starting playback if the Blue- Setting the airflow (COMAND) ......... 53
tooth® audio device has been Setting the climate mode
stopped ......................................... 199 (COMAND) ....................................... 53
Telephony ...................................... 114 Setting the temperature
Telephony notes ............................ 112 (COMAND) ....................................... 53
Burmester® high-end surround Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 54
sound system Climate control bar
Balance .......................................... 213 Calling up ......................................... 53
Calling up the sound menu ............ 213 COMAND
Equalizer ........................................ 213 Basic display menu .......................... 31
Equipment ..................................... 212 Basic functions ................................ 30
Sound profile ................................. 214 Controller ......................................... 23
VIP & BAL selection ....................... 214 Display ............................................. 21
Burmester® surround sound sys- Selecting operating mode ................ 31
tem Settings ......................................... 162
Balance .......................................... 212 Switching on/off .............................. 30
Calling up the sound menu ............ 211 COMAND display
Equalizer ........................................ 211 Cleaning instructions ....................... 21
Equipment ..................................... 211 Setting ............................................. 38
Surround sound ............................. 212 Contacts
Buttons and controller ........................ 23 Deleting ......................................... 132
Importing ....................................... 132
C Controller ............................................. 23
Copying music files
Call lists see Media Register
Displaying details ........................... 135 Copying/renaming/deleting files
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 134 see Media Register
Saving an entry in the address Country-specific information (nav-
book .............................................. 135 igation) ............................................... 101
Calling up the compass display ....... 106
6 Index

D Display COMAND
see COMAND display
Date format, setting ............................ 40 Displaying current position (navi-
Day design, setting ............................. 38 gation) .................................................. 89
Delayed switch-off time Displaying the artist and track
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 51 Radio ............................................. 171
Deleting Distance
Call lists ......................................... 136 see Route (navigation)
Destination DVD
Saving to SD memory card .............. 96 Notes on discs ............................... 183
Storing in the address book ............. 96 see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Destination (navigation) DVD video
Editing a previous destination .......... 97 Operating DVD functions ............... 206
Entering a destination by address .... 63 DYNAMIC SELECT
Entering a destination using the Configuration via the DYNAMIC
map ................................................. 73 SELECT controller ............................ 54
Entering a point of interest .............. 69 Configuring individual drive pro-
Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 77 gram ................................................ 54
Entering using Mercedes-Benz Displaying engine data ..................... 55
Apps ................................................ 77 Displaying vehicle data .................... 55
General notes .................................. 63 Setting options ................................ 55
Keyword search ............................... 66
Personal POIs and routes ................. 78 E
Saving .............................................. 95
Selecting an address book con- E-mail
tact as a destination ........................ 69 Answering ...................................... 143
Selecting from the list of last des- Calling up the settings menu ......... 138
tinations ........................................... 68 Changing the name of the e-mail
Destination/route download account .......................................... 139
Deleting a destination from the Configuring an e-mail account ....... 139
server ............................................ 158 Configuring the e-mails displayed .. 139
Displaying destinations in the Deactivating the e-mail function .... 139
vehicle ........................................... 157 Deleting ......................................... 145
Displaying the vehicle identifica- Displaying details ........................... 141
tion number (VIN) .......................... 159 Downloading e-mails manually ...... 139
Importing destinations ................... 158 Editing text templates .................... 144
Placing a call at the destination ..... 158 Forwarding ..................................... 143
Procedure and general informa- Inbox .............................................. 140
tion ................................................ 157 Reading .......................................... 140
Sending destinations to the Saving the sender in the address
server ............................................ 157 book .............................................. 145
Using a destination for route guid- Settings ......................................... 138
ance ............................................... 158 Storing the sender as a new entry
Using destinations ......................... 158 in the address book ....................... 144
Dialing a number (telephone) ........... 119 Using a phone number in the text .. 144
Display Using text templates ...................... 143
Selecting the design ........................ 38 Writing ........................................... 142
Switching on/off .............................. 39
Index 7

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature I
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 50 Importing/exporting data .................. 46
Entering the city .................................. 64 Incident (traffic report) ....................... 91
Exterior mirror Interior lighting
Activating/deactivating the auto- Setting the delayed switch-off
matic folding mirror function time (COMAND) ............................... 51
(COMAND) ....................................... 51 Intermediate destinations
Entering ........................................... 74
F Internet
Conditions for access .................... 148
Factory setting (reset function) ......... 47 Creating favorites .......................... 164
Favorites Entering the URL ............................ 160
Adding ............................................. 35 Favorites manager ......................... 164
Deleting ........................................... 36 Favorites menu .............................. 164
Displaying and calling up ................. 35 Menu functions .............................. 161
Moving ............................................. 36 Options menu ................................ 161
Overview .......................................... 35 Selecting/setting access data ....... 149
Renaming ......................................... 36 Setting automatic disconnection
Favorites (Internet) ........................... 164 of the Internet connection ............. 153
Favorites button .................................. 45 Setting up an Internet connection .. 149

G K
Google™ Local Search Keyword search (navigation)
Calling up Local Search ................. 154 Searching via COMAND ................... 68
Calling up settings ......................... 156 Selecting search options ................. 67
Deleting search queries ................. 156 Selecting search results ................... 67
Entering a search position and
search term ................................... 154 L
Importing a destination/route ....... 155
Lane recommendations
Popular Searches ........................... 155
Explanation ...................................... 85
Search history ............................... 155
Presentation .................................... 85
Setting the search radius ............... 156
Lighting
Using as the destination ................ 155
Setting the delayed switch-off
GPS reception ...................................... 58
time (COMAND) ............................... 51
Gracenote® Media Database ............ 187
Switching the locator lighting on/
off .................................................... 51
H List of access data
Handwriting recognition New provider ................................. 150
Switching text reader function List of mobile phone network pro-
on/off .............................................. 28 viders
Touchpad ......................................... 27 With the selected provider ............. 150
Heading up (navigation) ..................... 98 Locator lighting
Home Setting (COMAND) ........................... 51
see Home address Locking confirmation
Home address see Acoustic locking confirmation
Entering and saving ......................... 65
8 Index

M General notes ................................ 187


Keyword search ............................. 189
Map (navigation) Music genres ................................. 189
3D map ............................................ 98 Selecting by cover ......................... 189
Adjusting the scale .......................... 98 Starting the media search .............. 188
Building images ............................. 101 Memory card
Country-specific information ......... 101 see SD memory card
Displaying the next intersection .... 100 Mercedes-Benz Apps ......................... 159
Elevation modeling ........................ 101 Microphone, switching on/off ......... 121
Map heading up ............................... 98 Mobile phone
Map settings .................................... 98
Authorizing .................................... 116
Moving ............................................. 60
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
North orientation ............................. 98
face) .............................................. 114
Notes ............................................... 98
Connecting another mobile
Rotating the 3D map ...................... 101
phone ............................................ 117
Selecting POI symbols on the
De-authorizing ............................... 118
map ................................................. 99
Selecting text information on the Displaying Bluetooth® connection
map ................................................. 99 details ............................................ 118
Showing the map version ............... 100 Enabling for Internet access .......... 149
Switching highway information Monitor
on/off ............................................ 100 see COMAND display
Updating ........................................ 104 MP3
Map functions ...................................... 98 Copyright ....................................... 182
Media Interface Stop and playback function ........... 186
Basic display .................................. 200 see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Multimedia system
Playback options ........................... 202
Search ........................................... 201 see Display
Music
Selecting a music file ..................... 201
Supported devices ......................... 200 see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
MUSIC REGISTER
Supported file formats ................... 201
Switching to Media Interface ......... 200 General notes ................................ 190
My address
Video function ............................... 202
Media mode Saving .............................................. 65
Switching on .................................. 180
Media Register N
Basic display .................................. 190 Navigation
Calling up memory space informa- Adjusting the volume of the navi-
tion ................................................ 193 gation announcements .................... 30
Copying files .................................. 190 Alternative route .............................. 88
Deleting all files ............................. 193 Avoiding an area ............................ 102
Renaming/deleting files ................ 192 Basic settings .................................. 60
Selecting a playback mode ............ 194 Blocking a route section affected
Switching on .................................. 190 by a traffic jam ................................. 89
Media search Calling up the compass display ..... 106
Category list .................................. 188 Calling up the menu ....................... 105
Current tracklist ............................ 188 Canceling/continuing route guid-
General information ....................... 188 ance ................................................. 87
Index 9

Country information ....................... 101 Switching announcements on/


Displaying current position .............. 89 off .................................................... 87
Drive Information ........................... 106 Switching to ..................................... 59
Entering a destination ...................... 63 Traffic jam function .......................... 89
Entering a destination using geo- Updating the digital map ................ 104
coordinates ...................................... 77 Navigation announcements
Entering a destination using Switching off .................................... 30
Mercedes-Benz Apps ....................... 77 North orientation (navigation) ........... 98
Entering a destination using the
map ................................................. 73 O
Entering a point of interest .............. 69
Entering characters (character Off-road ................................................ 90
bar) .................................................. 33 Online and Internet functions
Entering intermediate destina- Calling up ....................................... 153
tions ................................................. 74 Calling up the device list ................ 152
Entry restriction ............................... 58 Destination/routes download ........ 156
First use ........................................... 58 Enabling a mobile phone for Inter-
General notes .................................. 58 net access ..................................... 149
GPS reception .................................. 58 Ending the connection ................... 154
Important safety notes .................... 58 Establishing a connection .............. 153
Info on navigation .......................... 107 Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ......... 159
Lane recommendation ..................... 85 Manually setting the access data
Map functions .................................. 98 of the mobile phone network pro-
Moving the map ............................... 60 vider .............................................. 150
Off-road/Off-map (off-road desti- Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website ..... 159
nation) ............................................. 90 Options menu ................................ 160
Online map display ........................ 106 Resetting settings .......................... 160
Personal POIs and routes ................. 78 Selecting the access data of the
Problems ....................................... 108 mobile phone network provider ..... 150
Reading out traffic reports ............... 94 Setting automatic disconnection
Repeating announcements .............. 86 of the Internet connection ............. 153
Route flight .................................... 107 Setting up an Internet connection .. 149
Route information ............................ 87 Web browser .................................. 160
Saving destinations .......................... 95 Own address (navigation)
Saving home address ....................... 65 see Home address
Selecting a destination from the
list of last destinations ..................... 68 P
Setting route options (avoiding: Pause function
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- Video DVD ..................................... 207
ries) ................................................. 61 Personal POIs and routes
Setting the announcements vol- Alert when approaching (personal
ume ................................................. 87 POI) .................................................. 79
Setting the route type (short General notes .................................. 78
route, fast route, dynamic route or Importing via Mercedes-Benz
economic route) ............................... 60 Apps ................................................ 80
Showing/hiding the menu ............... 59 Recording the route ......................... 82
Starting route calculation ................ 65 Saving .............................................. 79
Selecting and editing ....................... 81
10 Index

Settings for personal POIs ............... 78 Setting the waveband .................... 169
Phone book Sound settings (balance, bass,
Adding a new contact .................... 125 treble) ............................................ 172
Adding information to a contact .... 125 Station list ..................................... 170
Calling up ....................................... 123 Storing stations ............................. 170
Deleting a contact ......................... 126 Switching on .................................. 168
Displaying the details of an entry ... 125 Tagging music tracks (download-
Entering characters ......................... 32 ing/purchasing tracks from the
Saving a contact ............................ 126 iTunes Store®) ............................... 171
Searching for a contact ................. 124 Radio station
Symbol overview ............................ 124 Storing ........................................... 170
Phone call Read-aloud function
Dialing ........................................... 119 Automatic ........................................ 95
Picture viewer Read-aloud function for e-mails ....... 141
Changing view ............................... 208 Reading out
Displaying pictures ........................ 207 Traffic reports on the route .............. 94
Exiting the picture viewer .............. 208 Real-time traffic reports ..................... 91
General notes ................................ 207 Rear view camera
Starting a slide show ..................... 208 Displaying the image ........................ 52
PIN protection Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 52
Activating/deactivating ................... 46 Receiving vCards ............................... 133
POI (navigation) Redialing (telephone) ........................ 120
Calling up the menu ......................... 69 Reducing the volume
Category .......................................... 72 Switching announcements on/off
Defining the position for the POI (COMAND) ....................................... 61
search .............................................. 71 Reserve fuel level
Entering ........................................... 69 Switching announcements on/off
Rotating 3D POI ............................... 73 (COMAND) ....................................... 61
Selecting .......................................... 72 Resetting (factory settings) ............... 47
Previous destinations (navigation) .... 97 Road map
see Map (navigation)
Q Route (navigation)
Quick access for audio and tele- Selecting an alternative route .......... 88
phone Setting route options (avoiding:
Changing the station/music highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
track ................................................ 29 ries) ................................................. 61
Sending DTMF tones ........................ 29 Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
R economic route) ............................... 60
Starting calculation .......................... 65
Radio Route guidance
Activating/deactivating the sta- Canceling/continuing ...................... 87
tion presets display ....................... 171 Freeway information ........................ 85
Deleting a station .......................... 170 General notes .................................. 83
Displaying information ................... 172 Lane recommendations ................... 85
Displaying station information ....... 171 Off-road ........................................... 90
Displaying the artist and track ....... 171 Traffic reports .................................. 91
Overview ........................................ 168
Index 11

S Information chart ........................... 216


Selecting a location for the
Safety notes weather forecast ............................ 217
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 181 Switching on/off ........................... 216
Using the telephone ....................... 112 Weather map ................................. 219
Satellite radio Sound
Displaying information ................... 176 Switching on/off .............................. 30
Overview ........................................ 173 Sound settings
Registering .................................... 173 Calling up the sound menu ............ 210
Switching to ................................... 173 Equalizer ........................................ 210
SatRadio Sound system
Channel list updates ...................... 176
see Burmester® surround sound system
Memory functions .......................... 175 Speed dial
Music and sports alerts ................. 175
Deleting ......................................... 137
Notes ............................................. 172
Setting up ...................................... 136
Selecting a category ...................... 174 State/province
Selecting a channel ....................... 174
Selecting .......................................... 64
Tagging music tracks ..................... 176 Stop function
SD memory card
Video DVD ..................................... 207
Ejecting .......................................... 184 Storing stations
Inserting ........................................ 184
Radio ............................................. 170
Inserting/removing ........................ 184 Street name announcements
Searching for a gas station
Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 61
When the fuel level is low ................ 77 Switching between summer time
Seat-belt adjustment function
and standard time ............................... 39
Activating/deactivating
Switching on media mode
(COMAND) ....................................... 51
Via the device list .......................... 181
Selecting stations
Via the main function bar ............... 180
Radio ............................................. 169
System settings
Sending DTMF tones ......................... 121
Automatic volume adjustment ......... 44
Setting access data
Bluetooth® ....................................... 44
Online and Internet ........................ 150
Setting the language Date ................................................. 39
Importing/exporting data ................ 46
COMAND ......................................... 45
Language ......................................... 45
Setting the night design ..................... 38
Text reader speed ............................ 41
Setting the text reader speed ............ 41
Time ................................................. 39
Setting the volume
Time zone ........................................ 39
Telephone calls ................................ 30
Voice Control System ...................... 41
Setting the waveband
Radio ............................................. 169
T
Settings
Sound settings ............................... 210 Telephone
Short message Accepting a call (COMAND) ........... 119
see Text messages (SMS) Adding a call .................................. 121
SIRIUS weather display Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 30
5-day forecast ................................ 216 Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
Daily forecast ................................. 216 necting) ......................................... 116
Detail information .......................... 217 Call lists ......................................... 134
12 Index

Call waiting .................................... 122 Text messages (SMS) .................... 137


Calls with several participants ....... 121 Toggling ......................................... 121
Conference calls ............................ 122 Using the telephone ....................... 119
Connecting a mobile phone (gen- Writing e-mails ............................... 142
eral information) ............................ 114 Writing text messages ................... 141
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a Telephone number
mobile phone ................................. 118 Entering ......................................... 119
Deleting a speed dial preset .......... 137 Text messages (SMS)
Deleting messages ........................ 145 Calling the sender .......................... 144
Displaying Bluetooth® connection Calling up the settings menu ......... 138
details ............................................ 118 Configuring the text messages
Downloading messages manually .. 139 displayed ....................................... 138
E-mail ............................................. 137 Deleting ......................................... 145
E-mail requirements ....................... 138 Displaying details ........................... 141
E-mail settings ............................... 138 Downloading manually ................... 139
Ending an active call ...................... 123 Editing text templates .................... 144
Entering a number ......................... 119 Inbox .............................................. 140
Entering phone numbers ................ 119 Reading .......................................... 140
Establishing the connection from Reading aloud ................................ 141
the mobile phone ........................... 116 Settings ......................................... 138
Function restrictions ...................... 113 Storing sender in address book ..... 145
Functions available during a call .... 120 Storing the sender as a new
General notes ................................ 112 address book entry ........................ 144
Incoming call during an existing Using a phone number in the text .. 144
call ................................................. 122 Using text templates ...................... 143
Making a call ................................. 119 Writing ........................................... 141
Message conditions ....................... 138 Time
Message settings ........................... 138 Setting ............................................. 40
Operating options .......................... 113 Setting the format ............................ 40
Phone book .................................... 123 Setting the time ............................... 40
Reading messages ......................... 140 Setting the time zone ....................... 39
Reception and transmission vol- Setting the time/date format .......... 40
ume ............................................... 118 Switching automatic time on/off ..... 39
Reconnecting a mobile phone Touchpad
automatically ................................. 117 Calling up quick access for audio
Redialing ........................................ 120 and telephone .................................. 26
Rejecting a call (COMAND) ............ 119 Changing the input language for
Safety notes .................................. 112 handwriting recognition ................... 29
Sending DTMF tones ...................... 121 Changing the station/music
Setting up a speed dial .................. 136 track ................................................ 29
Switching between calls (call wait- Character suggestions ..................... 28
ing) ................................................ 121 Deleting characters ......................... 28
Switching between mobile Entering a space .............................. 28
phones ........................................... 117 Entering characters ......................... 28
Switching the microphone on/off .. 121 Gesture control ................................ 25
Telephone menu overview ............. 113 Handwriting recognition ................... 27
Text message conditions ............... 138 Operating the touchpad ................... 25
Text message settings ................... 138 Overview .......................................... 25
Index 13

Quick access for audio and tele- W


phone .............................................. 29
Switching ......................................... 25 Weather map (SIRIUS)
Switching input line ......................... 28 Activating/deactivating display
Track levels ............................................. 220
Selecting (CD, DVD, MP3) .............. 186 Calling up ....................................... 219
Traffic reports Legend ........................................... 223
Calling up a list ................................ 92 Moving ........................................... 219
Real-time traffic report .................... 93 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 220
Storm overview .............................. 224
U Storm watch areas ......................... 223
Time stamp .................................... 223
Updating the digital map .................. 104 Weather memory (SIRIUS)
USB audio mode Selecting an area ........................... 219
Selecting a track ............................ 186 Storing an area .............................. 219
USB devices Web browser
Connecting to the Media Inter- Entering a web address ................. 160
face ............................................... 184 WiFi
see Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode Activating ......................................... 42
Connecting the device ..................... 42
V
Vehicle settings
Calling up ......................................... 50
Video
see Video DVD
Video DVD
Control option ................................ 203
DVD menu ..................................... 206
DVD's control menu ...................... 205
Full-screen mode ........................... 204
Function restrictions ...................... 204
Menu options ................................. 204
Notes on discs ............................... 203
Overview ........................................ 204
Overview of DVD functions ............ 206
Pause function ............................... 207
Picture settings .............................. 204
Playing conditions .......................... 203
Safety notes .................................. 202
Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 207
Stop function ................................. 207
Switching to ................................... 204
Video menu ................................... 205
Voice Control System
Settings ........................................... 41
see Voice Control System
Volume, adjusting
Navigation messages ....................... 30
14 Introduction

Operating safety Rother road and traffic rules and regulations


Rnarrow bridges
Important safety notes
COMAND can give incorrect navigation com-
G WARNING mands if the actual street/traffic situation
Modifications to electronic components, their does not correspond with the digital map's
software as well as wiring can impair their data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor
function and/or the function of other net- all routes in an area. For example, a route may
worked components. In particular, systems have been diverted or the direction of a one-
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a way street may have changed.
result, these may no longer function as inten- For this reason, you must always observe
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of road and traffic rules and regulations during
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
accident and injury. ulations always have priority over the sys-
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tem's driving recommendations.
tronic components or their software. You Navigation announcements are intended to
should have all work to electrical and elec- direct you while driving without diverting your
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified attention from the road and driving.
specialist workshop. Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Look-
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- ing at the icons or map display can distract
tronics, the general operating permit is ren- you from traffic conditions and driving, and
dered invalid. increase the risk of an accident.
G WARNING Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
If you operate information systems and com- (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
cle while driving, you will be distracted from per second.
traffic conditions. You could also lose control This equipment complies with FCC radiation
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
Only operate the equipment when the traffic equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
situation permits. If you are not sure that this quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention ment C to OET65.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- This equipment has very low levels of RF
ment when the vehicle is stationary. energy that is deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation
You must observe the legal requirements for (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be
the country in which you are currently driving installed and operated with at least 8 inches
when operating COMAND. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and a
COMAND calculates the route to the destina- person's body (excluding extremities: hands,
tion without taking account of the following, wrists, feet and legs.)
for example:
Rtraffic
lights
Rstop and yield signs
Rmerging lanes
Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no
stopping zone
Introduction 15

Declarations of conformity Observe the following information when using


COMAND:
Vehicle components which receive
Rthe safety notes in this manual
and/or transmit radio waves
Rtraffic rules and regulations
USA only: The wireless devices of this vehicle Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- motor vehicles
ation is subject to the following two condi-
Attaching metalized retrofit film to the wind-
tions:
shield may affect radio reception and have a
1) These devices may not cause interference, negative impact on all other antennas (e.g.
and emergency antenna) in the vehicle interior.
2) These devices must accept any interfer- Protection against theft: this device is
ence, including interference that may cause equipped with technical provisions to protect
undesired operation of the device. it against theft. Further information on pro-
Changes or modifications not expressly tection against theft can be obtained from an
approved by the party responsible for com- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
pliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Canada only: The wireless devices of this Qualified specialist workshop
vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-
Read the information on qualified specialist
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
to the following two conditions:
1) These devices may not cause interference,
and Function restrictions
2) These devices must accept any interfer-
For safety reasons, some functions are
ence, including interference that may cause
restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in
undesired operation of the device.
motion. You will notice this, for example,
because either you will not be able to select
Correct use certain menu items or a message will appear
to this effect.
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their Data stored in the vehicle
function and/or the function of other net- Data recording
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic
result, these may no longer function as inten- information relating to vehicle operation, mal-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of functions, and user settings. This may include
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an information about the performance or status
accident and injury. of various systems, including but not limited
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-
tronic components or their software. You tems, that is stored and can be read out with
should have all work to electrical and elec- suitable devices, particularly when the vehi-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to
specialist workshop. properly diagnose and service your vehicle or
to further optimize and develop vehicle func-
tions.
Z
16 Introduction

COMAND/mbrace To read data recorded by an EDR, special


equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain the special equipment, such as law enforce-
situations, and the location of the vehicle may ment, can read the information by accessing
be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace the vehicle or the EDR.
system.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
For additional information please refer to the matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
Terms and Conditions. Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Event data recorders ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data bility arising from the extraction of this infor-
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-
is to record data that will assist in under- sonnel.
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
in certain crash or near crash-like situations, without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
such as during air bag deployment or when if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
to record data related to vehicle dynamics include responses to subpoenas by law
and safety systems for a short period of time, enforcement; by federal, state or local gov-
typically 30 seconds or less. ernment; in connection with or arising out of
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
such data as: and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Rhow various systems in your vehicle are Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup-
operating plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.
Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
Tampering with, altering, modifying or remov-
ing the EDR component may result in a mal-
seat belts are fastened
function of the SRS Module and other sys-
Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
tems.
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
This data can help provide a better under- ted. This means that in the event of such con-
standing of the circumstances in which flict, the federal regulation governs. As of
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial relating to EDRs.
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age, and Information on copyright
crash location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, can com- General information
bine the EDR data with the type of personal Information on licenses for free and Open
identification data routinely acquired during a Source software used in your vehicle and in
crash investigation. the electronic components can be found on
Introduction 17

this website: http://www.mercedes-


benz.com/opensource.

Your COMAND equipment

i These operating instructions describe all


the standard and optional equipment of
your COMAND system, as available at the
time of going to print. Country-specific dif-
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that
your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety-
relevant systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.

Z
18
19

Overview .............................................. 20
Touchpad ............................................. 25
Basic functions .................................... 30

Overview and operation


Character entry (telephony) ............... 32
Character entry (navigation) .............. 33
Favorites .............................................. 35
20 Overview

Overview
Components
Overview and operation

: COMAND display
; Touchpad
= Controller
COMAND consists of:
Rthe display
The COMAND display has 960 x 540 pixels.
Rthe single DVD drive
Rthe controller
Rthe touchpad (for COMAND with touchpad)
Rports in the center console (2 x USB, SD card slot)

An iPod® is connected via USB cable.


The controller and touchpad provide two options for entering characters and selecting func-
tions.

Functions RSound system


RHD FM radio and HD AM radio/satellite
You can select from two sound systems:
radio - Burmester® surround sound system

RMedia - Burmester high-end surround sound sys-

- Media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD tem for ultimate listening pleasure
video, two connection options for Media
Interface (e.g. iPod®), SD card, Blue-
tooth® audio, 10.8 GB Media Register on
the hard drive
- Music search using all media
Overview 21

RNavigation system Fast access to favorites functions using the


-Navigation via the hard drive favorites button on the controller or on the
- Destination entry using keyword search touchpad

Overview and operation


- Realistic 3D map with textured city mod-
els Display
- Personal POIs and routes using SD mem-
ory card General notes
- Navigation functions, e.g. Drive Informa-
! Avoid any direct contact with the display
tion surface. Pressure on the display surface
- Dynamic route guidance with traffic may result in impairments to the display,
reports via SIRIUS satellite radio which could be irreversible.
RCommunication
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair
- Messaging functions (text messages, your ability to read the display.
email) The display has an automatic temperature-
- Address book controlled switch-off feature. The brightness
- Internet browser is automatically reduced if the temperature is
- Mercedes-Benz Apps with Google Local too high. The display may then temporarily
Search™, destination/route download, switch off completely.
Facebook, Google Street View™, stock
prices, news and much more Overview
- Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website
- WiFi interface for the connection of a
smartphone to COMAND
- WiFi hotspot functionality to connect a
tablet PC or laptop in order to enable
access to the Internet using the custom-
er's mobile phone
RSIRIUS Weather
- Weather data as an information chart
(current forecast, 5-day preview,
detailed information)
: Status bar with displays
- Weather data on the weather map, e.g.
; Cover view (if available)
rain radar data, storm characteristics = Main display field
and the track of tropical cyclones (hurri- ? Climate control status display
canes, typhoons) The example shows media playback in SD
RVehicle functions memory card mode.
- Vehicle settings, e.g. belt adjustment
- Rear view camera Cleaning instructions
- DYNAMIC SELECT (individual drive pro- ! Do not touch the display. The display has
gram) a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is
RClimate control functions a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
Setting climate mode, for example screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
RFavorites button
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
22 Overview

The display must be switched off and have


cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a
Overview and operation

commercially available microfiber cloth and


cleaning agent for TFT and LCD displays. Do
not apply pressure to the display surface
when cleaning it, as this could cause irrever-
sible damage to the display. Then, dry the
surface with a dry microfiber cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or
abrasive cleaning agents. These could dam-
age the display surface.
Overview 23

Buttons and controller


Overview

Overview and operation


: Back button
; Controller
= Favorites button
? Switches COMAND on or off (Y page 30) and adjusts the volume (Y page 30)
A Touchpad

Back button Rselect a destination on the map


Rsave entries
You can use the % button to exit a menu or
to call up the basic display of the current The controller can be:
operating mode. Rturned 3
X To exit the menu: briefly press the % Rslid left or right 1
button. Rslid forwards or back 4
COMAND changes to the next higher menu
Rslid diagonally 2
level in the current operating mode.
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7
X To call up the basic display: press the
% button for longer than two seconds.
COMAND changes to the basic display of
Favorites button
the current operating mode. With the favorites button, you can select, add
or edit favorites.
Controller X Press the favorites button on the controller.

The controller in the center console lets you: The favorites are displayed.
X To select a favorite: turn and press the
Rselect menu items on the display
controller.
Renter characters
24 Overview

Other functions (Y page 35). 9 Press and hold:


: RScrolls quickly through all lists
Touchpad
Overview and operation

RIn the Radio/Media menu:


Alternatively, you can use the touchpad to selects a station, audio track or
select and enter information (Y page 25). video scene using rapid scrolling
RIn the Telephone menu: starts
Multifunction steering wheel
rapid scrolling if the phone book
is open
a RIn all menus: confirms the selec-
ted entry in the list
RIn the Radio/Media menu:
opens the list of available radio
sources and media
RIn the Telephone menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected num-
ber
ñ Switches off the Voice Control Sys-
tem (see the separate operating
instructions)
% Press briefly:
: Multifunction display
RBack
; Right control panel
RIn the Radio/Media menu: dese-
= Left control panel
lects the track or station list or
Left control panel list of available radio sources and
media
ò RCalls up the main menu RHides display messages
9 Press briefly: RExits the telephone book/redial
: RScrolls in lists memory
RSelects a menu or function % Press and hold:
RIn the Radio/Media menu: RCalls up the standard display in
opens the track or station list the Trip menu
and selects a station, an audio
track or video scene
Right control panel
RIn the Telephone menu:
switches to the phone book and ~ RRejectsor ends a call
selects a name or a telephone RExits
the telephone book/redial
number memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
Touchpad 25

W RAdjusts the volume Switching the touchpad on/off


X X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.

Overview and operation


8 RMute
X To select System Settings: slide 6 turn
ó Switches on the Voice Control Sys- and press the controller.
tem (see the separate operating A menu appears.
instructions) X To select Activate Touchpad: turn and
press the controller.
The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.
Touchpad
Touchpad overview
Operating the touchpad
! Do not use any sharp objects on the
touchpad. This could damage the touch- Selecting a menu item
pad.

X Use one finger to touch the touch-sensitive


: Touch-sensitive surface surface.
; Favorites button X Swipe your finger up, down, to the left or
= To call up quick access for audio and tele- right.
phone The selection in the display moves in
? Back button accordance with the direction of move-
Using the touchpad, you can: ment.
Rselect menu items in the display You can navigate in lists or menus in this way.
(Y page 25).
Renter characters (handwriting recognition) Confirming a selection
(Y page 27).
Rcontrol the active audio source
(Y page 29).
Rcreate, manage and call up favorites
(Y page 35).
Renter destinations in navigation
Rsave entries
Further information on operating the touch-
pad (Y page 25).
26 Touchpad

Do not press your finger too hard on the Operating the control for vehicle and
touchpad. This could cause malfunctions. sound settings
X Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive
Overview and operation

surface until you reach the pressure point.


A menu, an option or an application is star-
ted.

Calling up quick access for audio and


telephone

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two


fingers, spaced slightly apart.
X Turn both fingers clockwise.
The control setting is increased.
or
X Turn both fingers counter-clockwise.
The control setting is decreased.
X Use two fingers to touch the lower part of
the touch-sensitive surface. Moving the map
X Swipe your fingers up.
Quick access is displayed.
Further information on quick access for audio
and telephone (Y page 29).

Hiding the quick access for audio and


telephone

X Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive


surface until you reach the pressure point.
The crosshair is shown.

X Use two fingers to touch the touch-sensi-


tive surface.
X Swipe your fingers down.
Quick access is hidden.
Touchpad 27

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface again Handwriting recognition


with one finger.
X Swipe your finger in any direction.
Handwriting recognition overview

Overview and operation


The map is moved is the direction of move-
ment.

Zooming in on the map

: Active input line


; Enters a space (Y page 28)
= Illustration of the touch-sensitive surface
? Deletes characters (Y page 28)
X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two You can use handwriting recognition for text,
fingers, spaced slightly apart. numbers or characters in any input line.
X Glide your fingers away from each other. If the character that you have entered can be
The map scale is magnified. interpreted in different ways, these options
are displayed. More information on the char-
Zooming out of the map acter suggestions (Y page 28).
You can additionally switch the handwriting
recognition read-aloud function on and off.

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two


fingers, spaced far apart. : To exit the menu
X Glide your fingers towards each other.
; To return to handwriting recognition
The map scale is reduced.
= To use the phone book or text templates
? To change the input line or the position of
the cursor
A To change the input language
B To finish character entry
X To display the menu: press the touchpad.
28 Touchpad

Switching the text reader function of Deleting characters


the handwriting recognition on/off
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
You can switch the text reader function of the characters has been selected.
Overview and operation

handwriting recognition on or off. X Use your finger to touch the touch-sensi-


X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. tive surface and swipe to the left.
The vehicle menu is displayed. The character last entered is deleted.
X To select System Settings: slide 6 turn
and press the controller. Switching input line
A menu appears.
X To select Read Out Handwriting Rec‐
ognition: turn and press the controller.
The text reader function is switched on O
or off ª.

Entering characters
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X Use one finger to draw the desired charac-
ter on the touch-sensitive surface. X Press the touchpad.
The character recognized is entered in the A symbol is shown.
input line. You can draw the next character X To select p: swipe your finger to the left
on the touch-sensitive surface. or right and press.
X To select the desired input line, swipe up or
If the character can be interpreted in different
ways, these options are displayed. down and press.
The selected input line is active and char-
More information on the character sugges-
acter entry can be continued.
tions (Y page 28).

Character suggestions Moving the cursor within the input line


X To select a character suggestion: turn
the controller.
The selected character is entered instead
of the automatically recognized character.
Character entry can be continued.

Entering a space
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X Use your finger to touch the touch-sensi- X Press the touchpad.
tive surface and swipe to the right. A symbol is shown.
A space is entered into the input line. X To select p: swipe your finger to the left
or right and press.
X To move the cursor, swipe to the left or
right.
Touchpad 29

Changing the input language for hand- X To switch from handwriting recognition
writing recognition on the touchpad to character entry
using the controller: press the controller.
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or

Overview and operation


Character entry using the controller is
characters has been selected.
active.
X Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X To select B: swipe your finger to the left Quick access for audio and telephone
or right and press.
The list of available input languages Changing the station/music track
appears.
X To select a language: swipe up or down and
press.
To select a language: swipe up or down and
press.
The input language for handwriting recog-
nition has been changed.

Searching in lists
The phone book search is used as an exam-
ple. Depending on the audio source that is cur-
rently activated, you can use this function to
You determine the first letter of the contact select the next station or music track.
you are looking for with the first character you
X Call up quick access (Y page 26).
enter.
The current audio source is displayed.
X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
X To select the previous or next station or the
The first contact with the selected first
character is highlighted in the phone book. previous or next music track, swipe to the
left or right.
Further information on handwriting recog- The selected station or music track is
nition on the touchpad (Y page 27). played.
X Draw additional letters on the touchpad
surface one after another.
Sending DTMF tones
X To complete the search and return to
the phone book: press the touchpad. The function is not supported by all mobile
phones (see the manufacturer's operating
Switching between the controller and instructions).
the touchpad as input device X Call up quick access during a call
(Y page 26).
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or X To select the required characters: swipe
characters has been selected.
your finger to the left or right and press.
X To switch from character entry using Every character selected will be transmit-
the controller to handwriting recogni- ted immediately.
tion on the touchpad: use one finger to
press the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is
active.
30 Basic functions

Basic functions Adjusting the volume for phone calls


Switching COMAND on/off You can adjust the volume for hands-free
mode during a telephone call.
Overview and operation

X Press the control knob on the center


console to the right of the controller.
X Turn the control knob on the center
When you switch on COMAND, a warning console to the right of the controller.
message will appear. COMAND calls up the or
previously selected menu. X Press the W or X button on the mul-
If you switch off COMAND, playback of the tifunction steering wheel.
current media source will also be switched
i Setting the volume for the Voice Control
off.
System voice output, see the separate
operating instructions.
Adjusting the volume
Adjusting the volume for media sources Switching the sound on or off

X Turn the control knob on the center Media source sound


console to the right of the controller. X Press the 8 button on the multifunction
or steering wheel.
X Press the W or X button on the mul-
i If the audio output is switched off, the
tifunction steering wheel.
status line will show the 8 symbol. If
The volume of the media source currently
you switch the media source or change the
selected changes.
volume, the sound is automatically
switched on.
Adjusting the volume for traffic
announcements and navigation i Even if the sound is switched off, you will
announcements still hear navigation system announce-
ments.
During traffic or navigation announcements:
X Turn the control knob on the center Switching navigation announcements
console to the right of the controller. off and on again
or X To switch off navigation announce-
X Press the W or X button on the mul- ments: press the 8 button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel. tifunction steering wheel during the
announcement.
i You can set the volume for navigation The Spoken driving recommendations
announcements to be different from the have been deactivated. message
volume of the respective media source. appears.
X To switch navigation announcements
back on: switch COMAND off and then on
again (Y page 30).
or
X Start a new route calculation (Y page 65).
Basic functions 31

or X To show the menu: slide 4 the con-


X Select +: while route guidance is active, troller.
show the menu and press the controller The menu for the selected functions

Overview and operation


(Y page 86). appears. Depending on the operation, the
marking is shown in main function bar : or
menu bar ;.
Basic menu displays X To select a menu item: turn and press the
controller.
Once you have selected a menu item in :,
the last menu set for the selected function
appears.
Menu bar ; offers options in the current
media mode.

Selecting the operating mode for a


main function
X To show the main function bar: slide 5 You can select the available operating modes
the controller. for the main functions, e.g. telephone.
To select a main function, e.g. Navi: turn In the telephone menu, you can:
and press the controller. Rswitch to telephone mode
Navigation: the map displays the current Rcall up the address book
vehicle position.
Rcall up the digital operating instructions for
Radio: the basic menu of the last radio the telephone
mode set appears.
Media: the basic display for the last media
source set appears. In the example, SD
memory card mode is set.
Communication: the basic menu of the
last communication function set appears.
Vehicle functions: the basic display
appears.

X To display the main function bar: slide


5 the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
X To select Phone: 5 slide and press the
controller.
A menu appears. Phone is at the front.
X To select Address Book, for instance, turn
and press the controller.
32 Character entry (telephony)

Character entry (telephony)


Overview and operation

X To select a character: turn and press the


controller.
Writing a text message is used as an example. The character selected in character bar ?
Further information on writing a text message is entered into text message input line =.
(Y page 141). X To delete a character: switch to the bot-
X To select a character: turn and press the tom line of the character bar by sliding 6
controller. the controller.
The character selected in character bar ; X To select F, turn and press the controller.
is entered into telephone number input The character last entered is deleted.
line :.
X To delete an entire entry: switch to the
X To delete a character: switch to the bot- bottom line of the character bar by sliding
tom line of the character bar by sliding 6 6 the controller.
the controller. X To select F, turn the controller.
X To select F: turn and press the controller.
X Press and hold the controller until the
The character last entered is deleted.
entire entry is deleted.
X To switch input line: switch to the bottom X To change the country setting of the
line of the character bar by sliding 6 the character bar: switch to the bottom line of
controller. the character bar by sliding 6 the con-
X To select 5, turn and press the controller. troller.
or X To select B, turn and press the control-
X Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the ler.
character bar disappears. The available languages are displayed.
X To select the input line for the text of X Turn and press the controller.
the text message: slide 6 and press the Further functions available in the charac-
controller. ter bar
The input line for the text of the text mes-
sage is selected. The character bar has Symbol Function
been adapted for entering text.
Ä Switches between digits and
symbols
* Switches the character bar to
uppercase/lowercase letters
B Changes the country setting for
the character bar
Character entry (navigation) 33

Symbol Function The example shows the address entry


(Y page 64).
F Deletes a character/an entry X To enter a character: turn, slide 6 or

Overview and operation


4, 5 Selects the input line 5 and press the controller.
Selected character : is entered in the
2, 3 Moves the cursor within the upper line. COMAND adds the missing
input line characters and shows the entry that best
¬ Finishes an entry matches the current input.
The characters are available B or not ?,
& Cancels input depending on the characters already
S Inserts a paragraph entered and the data stored in the digital
map.
The G symbol indicates that an entry
Character entry (navigation) exists more than once.
X To delete a character: slide 6 and turn
Character entry options
the controller, then press it after selecting
You can enter characters using the controller F.
or the touchpad. With the controller, you X To delete an entire entry: slide 6 and
enter characters using a character bar. To
turn the controller; then after selecting F
enter using the touchpad, draw the character
press and hold down the controller until the
in the entry field. COMAND supports this
entire entry is deleted.
using a handwriting recognition function.
X To switch to keyword search: slide 6
and turn the controller, then press it after
Entering characters using the charac- selecting = (Y page 66).
ter bar
X To confirm an entry: slide 6 and turn
the controller, then press it after select-
ing¬.
or
X Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
The location selection list appears. The
selected entry is highlighted.

: Characters STUT entered by the user


(orange)
; Characters EBÜLL automatically added by
COMAND
= To switch to keyword search
? Characters not currently available
A Currently selected character
B Characters currently available : Cursor
C Character bar ; Entry line
34 Character entry (navigation)

The example shows the character entry when Symbol Function


you save a destination as a navigable contact
in the address book (Y page 65). è Switches to keyword search
Overview and operation

X To select an input line: slide 6 and turn (Y page 66)


the controller, then press it after selecting 4, 5 Selects the input line
4 or 5.
or 2, 3 Moves the cursor within the
input line
X Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears. ¬ Confirms an entry
X Turn and press the controller.
& Cancels input
X To move the cursor: select the input line.
X Slide 6 and turn the controller, then
press it after selecting 2 or 3. Entering characters using the touch-
pad

X To change the character bar language:


slide 6 and turn the controller, then Alternatively, you can enter characters using
press it after selecting B. the touchpad (Y page 25). Character entry is
A menu appears. supported by a handwriting recognition func-
X To select the language: turn and press the
tion.
controller. An example is the address entry
The character set for the selected language (Y page 64).
is set. X With one finger, draw the desired charac-

The character bar entry functions are listed in ter, e.g. the letter B, on the touch-sensitive
the table. surface.
In the list (e.g. City), the first entry that
Symbol Function starts with the letter entered is highlighted.
You can draw the next character on the
Ä Switches between digits and touch-sensitive surface.
symbols
If the character that you have entered can
* Switches the character bar to be interpreted in different ways, these
uppercase/lowercase letters options are displayed.
B Changes the character bar lan-
guage
F Deletes a character/an entry
Favorites 35

X To select a character suggestion: turn RMoving favorites (Y page 36)


the controller. RDeleting favorites (Y page 36)
The selected character is used for the list

Overview and operation


display instead of the automatically recog-
nized character. Character entry can be Displaying and selecting favorites
continued.
X To display the favorites overview: press
X To delete a character: touch the touch- the favorites button on the controller.
sensitive surface with your finger and glide X To call up favorites: turn and press the
your finger to the left. controller.
The character last entered is deleted.
X To finish the entry and switch back to the
list: press the touchpad. Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
Favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller.
Overview of favorites X To show the menu bar, slide 6 the con-
troller.
X To select Reassign: turn and press the
controller.
The categories for favorites are displayed.
RNavigation
REntertainment
RTel
RVehicle
RClimate Control

: To add a new favorite (Y page 35)
X To select a category: turn the controller
; To rename a selected favorite
and press to confirm.
(Y page 36)
The available favorites are displayed.
= To move a selected favorite
X To select a favorite: turn and press the
(Y page 36)
controller.
? To delete a selected favorite
X Adding a favorite at the desired posi-
(Y page 36)
tion: turn and press the controller.
X To display the favorites overview: press If a favorite is stored over another favorite,
the favorites button on the controller. the favorite underneath is deleted.
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller. Adding your own favorites
You can manage a total of 20 favorites. You can store phone numbers from the phone
To do so use the following functions: book, radio stations or destinations as favor-
RDisplayingand selecting favorites ites.
(Y page 35) A phone number from the phone book is used
RAdding favorites (Y page 35) as an example.
RRenaming favorites (Y page 36)
36 Favorites

X Call up the phone book (Y page 123). X To select Move: turn and press the control-
X Search for the contact and display the ler.
phone number: (Y page 124). X To store the favorite in the desired
Overview and operation

X To add a telephone number as a favorite order: turn and press the controller.
at the desired position: press and hold If a favorite is stored over another favorite,
the favorites button on the controller until the favorite underneath is deleted.
the favorites are displayed.
X Turn and press the controller.
If a favorite is stored over another favorite, Deleting favorites
the favorite underneath is deleted. X Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X To select a favorite to be deleted: turn
Renaming favorites the controller.
X Press the favorites button on the controller. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
The favorites are displayed. troller.
X To select the favorite to be renamed: X To select Delete: turn and press the con-
turn the controller. troller.
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con- X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
troller. The favorite is deleted.
X To select Rename: turn and press the con- X If you select No, the process will be can-
troller. celed.
X Enter characters using the controller
(Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).
X To finish the entry: select OK.
The favorite has been renamed.

Moving favorites

X Press the favorites button on the controller.


The favorites are displayed.
X To select the favorite to be moved: turn
the controller.
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
37

Your COMAND equipment .................. 38


Important safety notes ....................... 38
Display settings ................................... 38
Time settings ....................................... 39

System settings
Text reader settings ............................ 41
Voice Control System settings .......... 41
WiFi ...................................................... 41
Bluetooth® settings ............................ 44
Automatic volume adjustment .......... 44
Setting the system language ............. 45
Calling up and editing the Favor-
ites function ........................................ 45
Importing/exporting data .................. 46
Reset function ..................................... 47
38 Display settings

Your COMAND equipment X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.


The vehicle menu is displayed.
i These operating instructions describe all X To select System Settings: slide 6,
the standard and optional equipment of turn and press the controller to confirm.
your COMAND system, as available at the A menu appears.
time of going to print. Country-specific dif-
System settings

X To select Display: turn and press the con-


ferences are possible. Bear in mind that troller.
your vehicle may not feature all functions A menu appears.
described here. This also applies to safety- X Select Brightness.
relevant systems and functions. A control appears.
i Read the information on qualified special- X Select the desired brightness.
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.
Display design
Important safety notes The display features optimized designs for
daytime and night-time operation. You can
set the design by manually selecting day or
G WARNING
night design or opt for an automatic setting.
If you operate mobile communication equip-
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control The vehicle menu is displayed.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X To select System Settings: slide 6,

Only operate this equipment when the vehicle turn and press the controller to confirm.
is stationary. A menu appears.
X To select Display: turn and press the con-

G WARNING troller.
SD memory cards are small parts. They can be A menu appears.
swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto.
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal The # dot indicates the current setting.
injury.
Design Explanation
Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of
children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, Day Mode The display is set perma-
seek immediate medical attention. nently to day design.

You must observe the legal requirements for Night Mode The display is set perma-
the country in which you are currently driving nently to night design.
when operating mobile communications Automatic If the Automatic setting
equipment in the vehicle. is selected, COMAND
evaluates the readings
from the automatic vehi-
Display settings cle light sensor and auto-
Setting the brightness matically switches
between the display
The brightness detected by the display light designs.
sensor affects the setting options for this
function.
Time settings 39

Switching the display on/off X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
X To select Time: slide 6, turn and press
The vehicle menu is displayed.
the controller to confirm.
X To select Display Off: slide 6, turn and
A menu appears.
press the controller to confirm.

System settings
X To select Time Zone:: turn and press the
The display goes out.
controller.
X To switch the display on again: press the
A list of countries appears. The # dot indi-
controller. cates the current setting.
X Select the country you are currently in by
turning and pressing the controller.
Time settings The country is accepted.
General information A time zone list may also be displayed,
depending on the country selected.
COMAND can automatically set the time and
X To select the desired time zone: turn and
date.
press the controller.
The following navigation system functions The time zone is accepted.
require the time, time zone and summer and
standard time to be set correctly in order to A list of available options for setting sum-
work properly: mer time appears (Y page 39).
Rroute guidance on routes with time-
dependent traffic guidance Setting summer and standard time
Rcalculation of expected time of arrival
You can use the Daylight Saving Time
menu to set automatic summer time change-
Switching automatic time on and off over or switch the summer time setting on or
off. The changeover to summer time advan-
The Automatic Time Settings function is ces the time by one hour.
used to activate or deactivate the automatic The Daylight Saving Time menu or the
setting of the time and date. This function is Automatic option is not available in all coun-
activated when the vehicle leaves the factory. tries.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed. The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To select Time: slide 6, turn and press
X To select Time: slide 6, turn and press
the controller to confirm. the controller to confirm.
A menu appears. A menu appears.
X To select Automatic Time Settings:
X To select Daylight Saving Time: turn
press the controller. and press the controller.
X To switch the function on O or off ª: A list of available options for setting sum-
press the controller. mer time appears.
X To select Automatic, On or Off: turn and
press the controller.
Setting the time zone
To set the time zone, the Automatic Time
Settings function must be activated.

Z
40 Time settings

Setting Function The Automatic Time Settings function


is deactivated ª.
Automatic The summer and If Automatic is set for the summer time
standard time are changeover, a prompt will appear asking
automatically whether the automatic changeover should
changed over. be maintained between summer and winter
System settings

On The clock is time.


advanced one hour i If Automatic Time Settings is reacti-
ahead of standard vated, the previous settings for time zone
time. and summer time changeover are restored.
Off The standard time
for the chosen time
zone is selected. Setting the time and date format
Use this function to set the time and date for-
mat for all displays in the vehicle.
Manual time setting X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To select Time: slide 6, turn and press
the controller to confirm.
A menu appears.
X To select Format: turn and press the con-
troller.
X To select the desired date format: turn and
press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X To select the desired time format: turn and
Using the manual time settings, you can set press the controller.
the time forwards or backwards by up to sev- The # dot indicates the current setting.
eral hours.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. Abbreviation Meaning
The vehicle menu is displayed. YYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day
X To select Time: slide 6, turn and press
date format, year (all
the controller to confirm. four digits)
A menu appears.
X To select Set Time Manually: turn and YY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day
press the controller. date format, year
A menu with an analog clock appears. (two digits)
X To set the hour: turn the controller. MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year
X To highlight minutes: slide 9 the con- date format, year (all
troller. four digits)
X To set minutes: turn and press the control-
ler. DD/MM/YYYY Day/Month/Year
The time is accepted. date format, year (all
four digits)
WiFi 41

Abbreviation Meaning X To select Voice Control: turn and press


the controller.
HH:MM (24 hrs) Hours : Minutes X Select Help Window.
(24 hour time for- You have switched the help window on O
mat) or off ª.

System settings
HH:MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes More information on the Voice Control Sys-
(AM/PM time for- tem is available in the separate operating
mat) instructions.

Individualization
Text reader settings
Using individualization, you can fine-tune the
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. Voice Control System to your own voice. This
The vehicle menu is displayed. will help improve voice recognition (see the
X To select System Settings: slide 6, separate operating instructions).
turn and press the controller to confirm.
A menu appears.
WiFi
X To select Text Reader Speed: turn and
press the controller. Overview
A list appears.
Conditions:
X Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
The # dot indicates the current setting. To establish a WiFi connection between
COMAND and a WiFi-enabled device, such as
a tablet computer or smartphone:
Voice Control System settings RWiFi must be activated at COMAND and at
the device to be connected.
Opening/closing the help window If COMAND is to be used as a WiFi hotspot:
i If the set system language is not suppor- RCOMAND must be connected to an Inter-
ted by the Voice Control System, English net-enabled mobile phone via Bluetooth®
will be selected. or USB.
The help window also shows you information RThe Internet access data for the mobile
on audible instructions: phone network provider must be selected
Rduring individualization or set for COMAND.
Rduring RThere must be an Internet connection to
subsequent operation of the Voice
Control System COMAND.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To select System Settings: slide 6,
turn and press the controller to confirm.
A menu appears.

Z
42 WiFi

Activating WiFi Connecting a device via WPS PIN


System settings

X To select Vehicle from the main function Prerequisite:


bar: turn and press the controller. For this type of connection, the device to be
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the connected must support "Connect using WPS
controller. PIN".
X Select System Settings. X To select Vehicle from the main function
The System Settings menu is displayed. bar: turn and press the controller.
X Select WiFi. X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
The WiFi menu appears. controller.
X Select Activate. X Select System Settings.
X Press the controller. The System Settings menu is displayed.
Switch the connection on O or off ª, X Select WiFi.
depending on the previous setting. The WiFi menu appears.
X Select Connect via WPS PIN.
X Select the vehicle from the device to be
Connecting the device connected and "Connect using WPS PIN".
The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB
General notes
WLAN XXXXX.
i The exact WiFi connection procedure may The device to be connected generates a
vary depending on the device to be con- PIN.
nected. Follow the instructions that are X This PIN is also entered on COMAND.
shown in the display. Further information
can be found on the operating instructions Connecting the device by pressing a
for the device you wish to connect. button (push button)
WiFi 43

Prerequisite: X Enter the security key that appears on the


For this type of connection, the device to be COMAND display for the device to be con-
connected must support "Connect via push nected.
button". X Confirm the entry.

X To select Vehicle from the main function

System settings
bar: turn and press the controller.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the Generating a new security key
controller.
X Select System Settings.
The System Settings menu is displayed.
X Select WiFi.
The WiFi menu appears.
X Select Connect via WPS PBC.
X Select the vehicle from the device to be
connected and Connect via WPS PBC.
The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB
WLAN XXXXX.
X Select Continue in COMAND.
X To select Vehicle from the main function
bar: turn and press the controller.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Connecting the device via the security
controller.
key
X Select System Settings.
The System Settings menu appears.
X Select WiFi.
The WiFi menu appears.
X Select Generate Security Key.
X Select Regenerate.
A new security key is generated.
X To save the security key: turn the controller
and select Save.
The WiFi menu appears. The new security
key will now be displayed and verified when
X To select Vehicle from the main function
a connection is established via the security
bar: turn and press the controller.
key. The connection must be re-estab-
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
lished with the newly created security key.
controller.
X Select System Settings. i Device connections established using the
The System Settings menu is displayed. previous security key will no longer work
X Select WiFi. after the security key is changed. You have
The WiFi menu appears. to reconnect these devices (Y page 42).
X Select Connect Using Security Key.
X Select the vehicle from the device to be
connected. The vehicle is displayed with
the SSID MB WLAN XXXXX.

Z
44 Automatic volume adjustment

Changing the name of the SSID Bluetooth® technology is a standard for


short-range wireless data transmissions up to
approximately 10 meters. You can use Blue-
tooth® to connect your mobile phone to
COMAND to, for example:
System settings

Ruse the hands-free system


Restablish an Internet connection
Rlisten to music using Bluetooth® Audio
Rexchange vCards

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-


tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
X To select Vehicle from the main function
bar: turn and press the controller.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®
controller.
X Select System Settings.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The System Settings menu is displayed. The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To select System Settings: slide 6,
X Select WiFi.
The WiFi menu appears. turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X Select Change SSID.
X To select Activate Bluetooth: turn and
A dialog for entering the SSID appears.
press the controller.
X Enter the new SSID.
This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª.
X Select ¬.
X Press the controller.
From now on, when establishing a connec- Automatic volume adjustment
tion, the vehicle will be shown with the new
SSID both on the device to be connected General information
and in the Connect Using Security Key
With the Automatic Volume Adjustment
menu.
function, the volumes of different audio sour-
i Device connections established using the ces are adjusted for each other, to compen-
previous SSID will no longer work after the sate for relative differences in volume.
SSID is changed. You have to reconnect For example: changing from a relatively
these devices (Y page 42). quiet to a relatively loud radio station. The
volume for both stations sounds the same.
Manual readjustment of the volume is not
Bluetooth® settings required.
The Automatic Volume Adjustment func-
General information about Blue-
tion is deactivated ª when the vehicle leaves
tooth® the factory. Using this function, the dynamic
Bluetooth®-capable devices, e.g. mobile range of the music is slightly reduced. To
phones, have to comply with a certain profile make the most of the audiophile sound qual-
in order to be connected to COMAND. Every ity, it is recommended to leave it off.
Bluetooth® device has its own specific Blue-
tooth® name.
Calling up and editing the Favorites function 45

Switching the automatic volume Calling up and editing the Favorites


adjustment on/off function
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The Favorites function can, depending on the
The vehicle menu is displayed.
vehicle equipment, be called up as follows:
X To select System Settings: slide 6,

System settings
Rvia the System Settings menu
turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. Rvia the Favorites button on the controller
X To select Automatic Volume Adjust‐ Rvia the Favorites button on the touchpad
ment: turn and press the controller. (Y page 25)
Switch the Automatic Volume Adjust‐ Calling up the Favorites function via the
ment function on O or off ª. system menu:
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
Setting the system language
X To select System Settings: slide 6 and
press the controller.
This function allows you to determine the lan-
A menu appears.
guage for the menu displays and the naviga-
X To select Favorite Functions: press the
tion messages. The selected language affects
the characters available for entry. controller.
The favorites are displayed.
i The navigation announcements are not X To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
available in all languages. If a language is book: turn and press the controller.
not available, the navigation announce-
ments will be in English. Calling up the Favorites function via the
controller or touchpad:
i When you set the system language, the
language of the Voice Control System will X Press the Favorites button on the controller
change accordingly. If it is not supported by or touchpad.
the Voice Control System, English will be The favorites are displayed.
selected. X To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
book: turn and press the controller.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed. The Favorites function can be exited at any
X To select System Settings: slide 6, time.
turn and press the controller. To exit the Favorites function:
A menu appears.
X To select Language: turn and press the
X Press the Favorites button again
controller. or
The list of languages appears. The # dot X Press the % button on the controller
indicates the current setting. or
X Select the desired language. X Press the % button on the touchpad
COMAND loads the selected language and or
sets it. X To select % in the display: turn and
press the controller.
Further information on favorites (Y page 35).

Z
46 Importing/exporting data

Importing/exporting data X To enter the 4-digit PIN and select ¬:


turn and press the controller.
General notes You will be prompted to enter the PIN
Never remove the stick or card when writing again.
data to the USB stick or the memory card. You X Enter the PIN again and select ¬.
The PIN prompt now protects your personal
System settings

may otherwise lose data.


Using this function, you can do the following data from unwanted export.
with your personal COMAND data: i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you
Rtransfer from one system or vehicle to will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If
another system or vehicle. you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized
Rmake a backup copy (export data) and load Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your
it again (import data). PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you
Rprotect your data from unwanted export by can deactivate PIN protection by resetting
activating a PIN prompt (presetting: deac- your personal COMAND data
tivated ª). (Y page 47).
You can either use an SD memory card or a
USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as tem-
Importing/exporting data
porary storage.
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184).
or
Activating/deactivating PIN protec- X Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory
tion stick) (Y page 184).
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed. The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To select System Settings: slide 6,
X To select System Settings: slide 6 and
turn and press the controller. press the controller.
A menu appears. A menu appears.
X To select Data Import/Export: turn and X To select Data Import/Export: turn and
press the controller. press the controller.
X Select Activate PIN Protection. X Select Import Data or Export Data.
Activate O or deactivate ª PIN protec-
tion. When activating PIN protection, you
i If you import data such as address data,
the existing data on COMAND is overwrit-
will be prompted to enter a PIN.
ten. You will see a message to this effect.
COMAND is restarted after the data import.
Reset function 47

If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
appears when you select Export Data. The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To enter the PIN: turn the controller and X To select System Settings: slide 6,
press ¬ to confirm. turn and press the controller to confirm.
PIN protection is deactivated. A menu appears.

System settings
X To select Memory Card, Media Inter‐ X To select Reset: turn and press the con-
face 1 or Media Interface 2: turn and troller.
press the controller. A prompt appears asking whether you wish
This function exports all the data to the to reset.
selected disc.
X Select Yes or No.
A window appears with the message that
If you select No the process is canceled.
the data has been exported.
If you select Yes a prompt will appear again
You can export address data, bookmarks, asking whether you really wish to reset.
system settings that you have made and radio
X Select Yes or No.
station lists, for example.
If you select Yes a message will be shown.
Personal music files in the MEDIA REGISTER COMAND is reset to the factory settings
cannot be saved and imported again using and restarted.
this function.
If you select No the process is canceled.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.

Reset function

You can reset COMAND to the factory set-


tings. Amongst other things, this will delete all
personal COMAND data. These include, for
example:
RStation presets
REntries in the destination memory
REntries in the list of previous destinations in
the navigation system
REntries in the address book
RAuthorized telephone
In addition, an activated PIN protection,
which you have used to protect your data
against unwanted export, will be deactivated.
Resetting is recommended before selling or
transferring ownership of your vehicle, for
example.
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music
files in the MEDIA REGISTER, will be deleted.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.

Z
48
49

Your COMAND equipment .................. 50


Important safety notes ....................... 50
Vehicle settings ................................... 50
Rear view camera ................................ 52
Climate control settings ..................... 52
DYNAMIC SELECT ................................ 54

Vehicle functions
50 Vehicle settings

Your COMAND equipment X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.


The vehicle menu is displayed.
i These operating instructions describe all X To select Vehicle Settings: press the
the standard and optional equipment of controller.
your COMAND system, as available at the The Vehicle Settings menu is active.
time of going to print. Country-specific dif- X To select the desired vehicle setting: turn
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that and press the controller.
your vehicle may not feature all functions The main area with the setting element is
Vehicle functions

described here. This also applies to safety- active.


relevant systems and functions.
Selecting a different vehicle setting:
i Read the information on qualified special- X To activate the menu for selecting the vehi-
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's
cle setting: slide 5 the controller.
Manual.
Exiting the vehicle settings:
X To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
Important safety notes troller.

G WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip- Setting the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control This function makes getting in and out of your
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. vehicle easier.
X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50).
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary. X To select Easy Entry/Exit: turn and
press the controller.
You must observe the legal requirements for The setting element is active.
the country in which you are currently driving X To change the setting: press the controller.
when operating mobile communications
equipment in the vehicle. You can find further information on the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.
Vehicle settings
Calling up vehicle settings Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking confirmation
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked.
X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50).
X To select Acoustic Lock Feedback: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending
on the previous setting.
You can find further information on the lock-
ing feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Vehicle settings 51

Activating/deactivating the seat-belt X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50).


adjustment function X To select Locator Lighting: turn and
press the controller.
The Belt Adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the X Press the controller.

upper body of the occupants. The function is switched on or off, depend-


ing on the previous status.
X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50).
X To select Belt Adjustment: turn and You can find further information on the loca-
tor lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Vehicle functions
press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending
on the previous setting.
Switching the automatic locking fea-
You can find further information on seat-belt ture on/off
adjustment in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the vehicle is trav-
Activating/deactivating the auto- eling faster than walking pace.
matic folding mirror function X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50).
X To select Automatic Locking: turn and
When the Automatic Mirror Folding func-
tion is activated, the exterior mirrors fold in press the controller.
automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle The function switches on or off, depending
from the outside. The exterior mirrors fold out on the previous setting.
automatically again as soon as you unlock the You can find further information on the lock-
vehicle. ing feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50).
X To select Automatic Mirror Folding:
turn and press the controller. Setting the delayed switch-off time
The function switches on or off, depending Interior lighting delayed switch-off
on the previous setting.
The interior lighting is activated for the dura-
You can find further information on the auto- tion of the delayed switch-off time when the
matic folding mirror function in the vehicle SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.
Operator's Manual.
X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50).
X To select Interior Lighting Delayed
Switching locator lighting on/off Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
If you switch on the Locator Lighting func-
X To change the delayed switch-off time: turn
tion, the exterior lighting is switched on for a
short time when it is dark. The light switch the controller.
must be set to à (see the vehicle Opera- You can find further information on the inte-
tor's Manual). rior lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
The exterior lighting remains on for
40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. Exterior lighting delayed switch-off
When you start the engine, the locator light- If you switch on the Exterior Lighting
ing is switched off and automatic headlamp Delayed Switch-off function, the exterior
mode is activated. lighting is switched on for a short time after
the engine is switched off. The light switch

Z
52 Climate control settings

must be set to à (see the vehicle Opera- X Select Activation by R gear.


tor's Manual). The function is switched on O or off ª,
The exterior lighting remains on for depending on the previous status.
60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If For further information on the rear view cam-
you close all the doors and the tailgate, the era (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
exterior lighting switches off after the set
time.
X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 50). Climate control settings
Vehicle functions

X To select Exterior Lighting Delayed


Overview
Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active. You can adjust the climate control settings
X To change the delayed switch-off time: turn
using the climate control bar (Y page 52) or
the controller. the climate control menu (Y page 53).
You can set the most important climate con-
trol functions, such as temperature
Rear view camera (Y page 53), airflow (Y page 53) and air
distribution (Y page 53) using the climate
General notes control bar. The climate control bar is visible
in most displays.
The rear view camera covers the immediate
surroundings of the vehicle and assists you You can find all available climate control func-
when parking. tions in the climate control menu. You can use
the climate control bar (Y page 52) to
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
switch to the climate control menu.
replacement for your attention to your imme-
diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
Settings in the climate control bar
maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the area Overview
in which you are maneuvering.
You can find further information about the
rear view camera in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.

Switching the rear view camera auto-


matic mode on/off
This function activates the rear view camera
when reverse gear is engaged.
: Adjusts temperature and air distribution
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
and displays the current setting
The vehicle menu is displayed.
; Calls up the climate control menu, dis-
X Slide 6 the controller. plays the current cooling and climate
X To select System Settings: turn and mode setting
press the controller. = Adjusts air distribution and temperature
X Select Rear View Camera. and displays the current setting
The Rear View Camera menu appears.
Climate control settings 53

Calling up the climate control bar Calling up the climate control menu
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.

Setting the temperature

Vehicle functions
X Call up the climate control bar (Y page 53).
X To select the current temperature on the
left or right: turn and press the controller.
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The temperature setting scale appears.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To change the setting: turn the controller.
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
X To close the temperature setting scale:
climate control bar is activated.
press the controller.
X To select from climate control bar ;: turn
i You can also use the climate control menu and press the controller.
to set the temperature (Y page 53). The menu for selecting climate control
functions is activated.
Setting the air distribution X To select the desired climate control func-
tion: turn and press the controller.
X Call up the climate control bar (Y page 53). The selected climate control function
X To select the current air distribution display appears.
on the left or right, e.g. O: turn and
press the controller.
The air distribution setting scale appears. Settings in the climate menu
X To change the setting: turn the controller.
Adjusting the climate mode settings
X To close the temperature setting scale:
press the controller. By setting the climate mode you determine
the type of airflow. The setting is active when
i You can also use the climate control menu the air-conditioning system is set to Ã,
(Y page 53) to set the air distribution. see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
X Call up the climate control menu
Setting the airflow (Y page 53).
X To select Climate Mode: turn and press
X Call up the climate control bar (Y page 53).
the controller.
X To select J: turn and press the control-
X To change the setting: turn the controller.
ler.
The airflow setting scale appears. Exiting a menu
X To change the setting: turn the controller.
X Press the % button.
X To close the temperature setting scale:
The current airflow setting is shown in the cli-
press the controller.
mate control bar: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS
i You can also use the climate control menu (Y page 52).
(Y page 53) to set the airflow.

Z
54 DYNAMIC SELECT

Settings in the bottom bar of the cli- Synchronizing the climate control set-
mate control menu tings
Switching climate control on/off Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the
climate control setting for all zones together
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the O or separately ª.
climate control menu. This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
X Call up the climate control menu climate control menu.
(Y page 53).
Vehicle functions

X Call up the climate control menu


X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the (Y page 53).
bottom bar is activated. X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
X To select O Climate Ctrl On: turn and bottom bar is activated.
press the controller. X To select O Sync: turn and press the con-
The climate control is switched on O or off troller.
ª depending on the settings. X Switch the synchronization function on O
If the climate control is switched off: or off ª.
Rthe climate control setting functions are For further information on synchronizing cli-
deactivated. mate control settings (see the vehicle Oper-
Rthe blower is switched off. ator's Manual).
Rthe air recirculation flaps are closed.

DYNAMIC SELECT
Switching cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation on/off General notes
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the You can use DYNAMIC SELECT to configure
climate control menu. the following settings for the Individual drive
X Call up the climate control menu program:
(Y page 53). RDrive system
X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the RSuspension
bottom bar is activated. RTransmission
X To select A/C: turn and press the controller. RSports exhaust system
X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on RESP®
O or off ª.
In addition, current vehicle and engine data
i The current status of the cooling function can be visualized via the two further Vehi‐
is displayed in the climate control bar: A/C cle Data and Engine Data menus.
ON – activated, A/C OFF – deactivated There may be fewer settings depending on
(Y page 52). the vehicle equipment..
i Deactivating the cooling with air dehu-
midification function reduces fuel con- Configuration via the DYNAMIC
sumption. SELECT controller
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
select the Individual Configuration
DYNAMIC SELECT 55

drive program (see the vehicle Operator's X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
Manual). The vehicle menu is displayed.
A window appears after a short while. X To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press
X To confirm Adjust: press the controller. the controller.
The Individual Configuration menu The Individual Configuration, Vehi‐
for setting the drive program appears. cle Data and Engine Data menus
X To select Drive, Suspension, Transmis‐ appear.
sion, Exhaust System or ESP: turn and X Select Engine Data.

Vehicle functions
press the controller. The following current data is displayed:
The menu symbol, text and image show the REngine output
selected setting. REngine torque
RTransmission fluid temperature
REngine oil temperature
Displaying vehicle data
i There may be fewer displays depending
on your vehicle's equipment. Setting options
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. You can choose from the following settings
The vehicle menu is displayed. for the drive:
X To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press
the controller. R Race
The Individual Configuration, Vehi‐ C Comfort
cle Data and Engine Data menus
appear. S Sport
X Select Vehicle Data.
S+ Sport +
Updates of the following data are dis-
played:
You can make the following settings for the
RRoad type analogous to the selected
suspension:
drive program
RG-force display of longitudinal and lateral C Comfort
acceleration
S Sport
RAccelerator and brake pedal activity
RActivity of the spring struts S+ Sport +
RWheel angle
RInactive overrun mode animation You can choose from the following settings
for the transmission:
The G-force display is not available in all of the
drive programs. D Automatic
Daytime or night-time view is shown depend-
M Manual
ing on the automatic light sensor.

Displaying engine data


i There may be fewer displays depending
on your vehicle's equipment.

Z
56 DYNAMIC SELECT

You can make the following settings for the


sports exhaust system:

C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport +
Vehicle functions

You can choose from the following settings


for the Electronic Stability Program ESP®:

S Sport
On Activates the Electronic Sta-
bility Program ESP®
57

Your COMAND equipment .................. 58


Introduction ......................................... 58
Basic settings ...................................... 60
Destination entry ................................ 63
Personal POIs and routes ................... 78
Route guidance ................................... 83
Real-time traffic reports ..................... 91
Storing destinations ........................... 95

Navigation
Map functions ...................................... 98
Navigation functions ........................ 105
Problems with the navigation sys-
tem ..................................................... 108
58 Introduction

Your COMAND equipment does not correspond with the digital map's
data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor
i These operating instructions describe all all routes in an area. For example, a route may
the standard and optional equipment of have been diverted or the direction of a one-
your COMAND system, as available at the way street may have changed.
time of going to print. Country-specific dif- For this reason, you must always observe
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that road and traffic rules and regulations during
your vehicle may not feature all functions your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
described here. This also applies to safety- ulations always have priority over the sys-
relevant systems and functions. tem's driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
Navigation

i Read the information on qualified special-


ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's direct you while driving without diverting your
Manual. attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Look-
Introduction ing at the icons or map display can distract
you from traffic conditions and driving, and
Important safety notes increase the risk of an accident.
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com- General notes
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from Operational readiness of the navigation
traffic conditions. You could also lose control system
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
The navigation system must determine the
Only operate the equipment when the traffic position of the vehicle before first use or
situation permits. If you are not sure that this whenever operational status is restored.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Therefore, you may have to drive for a while
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- before precise route guidance is possible.
ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for GPS reception


the country in which you are currently driving Among other things, correct functioning of
when operating COMAND. the navigation system depends on GPS recep-
COMAND calculates the route to the destina- tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may
tion without taking account of the following, be impaired, there may be interference or
for example: there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tun-
Rtrafficlights nels or parking garages.
Rstop and yield signs
Entry restriction
Rmerging lanes
Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no For vehicles in certain countries, there is a
stopping zone data entry restriction.
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The restriction is active from a vehicle speed
of above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). As
Rnarrow bridges
soon as the speed falls below approximately
COMAND can give incorrect navigation com- 2 mph (3 km/h), the restriction becomes
mands if the actual street/traffic situation inactive.
Introduction 59

When the restriction is active, certain entries Showing/hiding the menu


cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
fact that certain menu items are grayed out
and cannot be selected.
The following entries are not possible, for
example:
Rentering the destination city and street
Rentering a destination via the map
Rentering POIs in the vicinity of a city or via a
name search

Navigation
Rediting entries
Using the menu, you can make a destination
Other entries are possible, such as entering entry or select the navigation settings, for
points of interest in the vicinity of the desti- example.
nation or current position.
X To show: slide 6 the controller when the
map appears.
Switching to navigation mode or
X Glide down the touchpad with one finger.
If there has been no route calculated, Des‐
tination is marked.
If a route has been calculated, y is
marked.

: Traffic reports can be received or traffic


reports are available
X To show the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler. X To hide: press the % button.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- or
tion or the navigation menu appears. X Slide 5 the controller.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the Full screen symbol : appears.
controller. X Press the controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.

Z
60 Basic settings

Moving the map X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


ler.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X Select Route Settings.

X Select a route type.


A filled circle indicates the current selec-
tion.
RActive route guidance: COMAND calcu-
lates a new route.
Navigation

RInactive route guidance: COMAND uses


Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the selection as the new setting.
the menu is faded out (Y page 59).
i Route guidance active: a destination has
X Press the controller.
been entered and the route has been cal-
The crosshair is shown. culated.
X Slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller.
Route guidance inactive: no destination
The map moves in the corresponding direc- has been entered yet and no route has been
tion under the crosshair. calculated yet.
i Enter a destination using the map
(Y page 73). Fast COMAND calculates a route
Route with a short journey time.
Dynamic Based on the Fast Route
Basic settings
Traffic route type and includes traf-
Selecting the route type Route fic reports on the route for
the route guidance.
Eco Route COMAND calculates an
economical route. The jour-
ney may take slightly longer
compared to taking the fast
route.
Short COMAND calculates a
Route shorter route.

The Dynamic Traffic Route route type


X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
uses real-time traffic reports from SIRIUS sat-
the controller. ellite radio.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Further Information on real-time traffic
ler. reports (Y page 91).
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
X To calculate alternative routes: select
tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
Calculate Alternative Routes.
Switch the function on O or off ª.
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- Function activated: after each route calcu-
tion. lation, route alternatives are offered that
Basic settings 61

correspond to the local conditions Depending on local conditions, COMAND


(Y page 88). may not always be able to include all route
If desired, you can have COMAND calculate options. A route may include a ferry, for
alternative routes even during route guid- instance, even though Avoid Ferries is ena-
ance (Y page 88). bled. COMAND will notify you of this visually
and through a navigation message.

Setting route options

Navigation
X To use toll roads: turn and press the con-
troller.
X To avoid/use route options: select A menu appears.
X Select an option.
Avoid Options.
A menu appears. The options include using roads that
X Select one of the options.
require cash payment or electronic billing,
or switching off the function.
O: using or avoiding route options is ena-
bled X To exit a menu: slide 8 the controller.
ª: using or avoiding route options is disa-
bled
RMenu item Avoid Area (Y page 102) Selecting announcements
COMAND enables you to avoid areas you
do not wish to drive through.
RMenu item Avoid Highways
RMenu item Avoid Ferries
RMenu item Avoid Auto Trains
RMenu item Avoid Tunnels
RMenu item Avoid Unpaved Roads
The function is not available in all countries.
RMenu item Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
RMenu item Use Carpool Lanes
If your vehicle meets the access conditions
for carpool lanes, you can use this function.
Navigation includes carpool lanes if the car-
pool lanes option is activated.

Z
62 Basic settings

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 Using car pool lanes


the controller.
You can include carpool lanes (HOV or car
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
sharing lanes) in the route calculation.
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please
tion or the navigation menu appears. observe the applicable laws as well as the
local and time limitation conditions.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. Carpool lanes may only be used under certain
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- conditions. They can normally be used when
tion. there are two people in the vehicle. However,
there are also carpool lanes which can only be
Navigation

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- used when there are three or more people in
ler. the vehicle. In California, lone drivers can use
X To select Options: turn and press the con- a carpool lane if their vehicle's emission level
troller. or fuel consumption is below a fixed thresh-
X Select Settings. old.
X Select an option. Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific
Switch the option on O or off ª. times (e.g. during the peak period).
Carpool lanes are indicated by a diamond
Announce COMAND announces the symbol on specific road signs and on the road
Street names of the streets to which surface. The road signs may also include the
Names the impending change of designation CARPOOL. The lanes are
direction will lead. arranged as a separate lane next to the others
The function is not available or are built as a physically separate lane.
in all countries. Depending on the setting under Use Car‐
pool Lanes, COMAND uses carpool lanes
Audio The volume of an active
when calculating the route. During route guid-
Fadeout media source is automati-
ance, visual and audible driving directions
cally reduced during a navi-
provide guidance into and out of carpool
gation announcement.
lanes.
Gas on Function activated: once the X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
Reserve reserve fuel tank level is the controller.
reached, a message appears X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
to help you start a gas station ler.
search. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
Atten‐ Function activated: if ATTEN- tion or the navigation menu appears.
tion TION ASSIST displays a warn- X If the navigation menu appears, press the
Assist ing in the multifunction dis- controller.
play, a message appears in The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
the COMAND display when tion.
driving on a highway. This can X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
help you start a rest stop
ler.
search.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
For further information on
troller.
ATTENTION ASSIST, see the
X Select Route Settings.
vehicle Operator's Manual.
Destination entry 63

X Select Avoid Options. Using an address


X Select Use Carpool Lanes.
Carpool lanes will either be used O or Calling up the address entry menu
avoided ª when calculating the route.

Destination entry
Important safety notes
G WARNING

Navigation
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
the controller.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
ler.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
tion or the navigation menu appears.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
controller.
You must observe the legal requirements for The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
the country in which you are currently driving tion.
when operating COMAND. X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
Destination entry may be blocked while driv- ler.
ing, depending on the country specifications. X To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X Select Address Entry.
General notes
The various character entry options are Address entry options
described for the controller. Alternatively you
can use the touchpad to enter characters and Examples of how you can enter an address:
select menus (Y page 25). RCity/ZIP, street, house number
RCity/ZIP, street
RCity/ZIP, center
RCity/ZIP, street, intersection
RStreet, City/ZIP, house number
RStreet, City/ZIP, intersection
The address can be entered faster by entering
the street before the city if the address has an
unusual street name.

Z
64 Destination entry

While entering an address, you can also


switch to other destination entry options:
RKeyword search (Y page 66)
RMap (Y page 73)
RPOI (Y page 69)

Entering an address

X To select Town: press the controller.


Navigation

X Enter the city, e.g. New York. Then call up


the list and select an entry. Proceed in the
same way as when entering a street.
X To select No.: press the controller.
X Enter the house number. Then call up the
list and select an entry. Proceed in the
same way as when entering a street.
The example shows you how to enter a city, The address entry menu shows the
street and house number for an address, e.g. address. The adjacent map section shows
for your home address. the destination.
X Call up the address entry menu The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-
(Y page 63). ted (current vehicle position) is at the top of
X To select Street: turn and press the con- the list of cities. When entering an address as
troller. the destination, the locations for which route
X Enter BROADWAY. Character entry
guidance has already been carried out are
more prominently available.
(Y page 33).
You can enter any of the cities, streets, ZIP
codes, etc. which are stored in the digital
map.
State/province and city are sufficient to start
navigating. You can enter either a city or a ZIP
code. The street and house number complete
the destination address.

Entering additional address data


You can enter additional address data:
X To call up the list: slide 5 the controller RState/province
repeatedly until the character bar disap- You can use Last Used to select the last
pears. selected state (USA) or province (Canada).
or You can also select Mexico and The Baha-
X To select OK, turn and press the controller. mas.
RZIP code
Entering a ZIP code will delete a previously
entered city.
Destination entry 65

RCenter
Entering a center will delete a previously
entered street.
RIntersection
Entering an intersection will delete a previ-
ously entered house number.
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 63).
X To select State/Province, ZIP Code,
Center or Intersection: turn, slide 6 As a contact: select As New Contact.

Navigation
X
and press the controller.
X Select Not Classified, Home or Work.
X Enter and select the address element.
X Enter a surname and first name
(Y page 32).
Saving an address
X To select OK: turn and press the controller.
You can store the address entered as: The destination address is saved in the
Ra home address in the address book address book as a navigable contact.
Ra navigable address book contact
Starting route calculation
For further information on the address
book, see (Y page 127)
Ra personal destination on the SD memory
card (Y page 96)

: To view the vicinity of the destination


The entered destination appears in the
address entry menu.
X To confirm Start or Continue: press the
X Call up the address entry menu
controller.
(Y page 63).
If you select Start: the route is calculated
X To select Save: slide 6, turn and press
with the current route settings (Y page 60).
the controller. While route calculation is in progress, an
X As the home address: select As "My arrow will indicate the direction to your
Address". destination. Once the route has been cal-
COMAND stores your home address under culated, route guidance begins. If the vehi-
My Address in the list of contacts. cle is traveling on a non-digitized road, the
system displays the linear distance to the
destination, the direction to the destination
and the Road Not Mapped message.

Z
66 Destination entry

Selection Continue: If Calculate Alter‐ Keyword search


native Routes is activated, alternative
routes are calculated (Y page 61). You can Entering keywords
display these and select them for route
guidance (Y page 88).
If route guidance has already been activa-
ted, a prompt will appear asking whether
you wish to end the current route guidance.
X To select Yes or Set as Intermediate
Destination: turn and press the control-
Navigation

ler.
Yes cancels the current route guidance and
starts route calculation to the new destina-
tion. The keyword search is used to help find des-
Set as Intermediate Destination tinations using fragments of words. The key-
adds the new destination in addition to the word search is tolerant of errors.
existing destination and opens the inter- It can be used for an address or a POI. For
mediate destinations list. example, you can search for the Empire State
i The route is calculated using the digital Building in New York.
map data. The calculation time depends on The keyword search finds geographically tol-
the distance from the destination, for erant hits. If, for example, you are searching
example. for a street located on the edge of a major
The calculated route may differ from the city, the search will also cover adjacent
ideal route, e.g. due to roadworks or incom- smaller cities.
plete map data. Please also refer to the The keyword search supports languages
notes about the digital map (Y page 104). using Latin characters.
X To call up the keyword search: select X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
è by sliding 6, turning and pressing the controller.
the controller in the address entry menu. X To select Navi: turn and press the control-

X To view the vicinity of the destination: ler.


to select :, turn and press the controller. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
You can explore the destination area. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
Requirement for exploring a destination
(USA): mbrace must be activated for Inter- controller.
net access (Y page 148). The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
Requirement for exploring a destination
(Canada): a mobile phone must be connec- X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ted via Bluetooth® (Y page 114) or USB ler.
(Y page 200) with COMAND. X To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X Select Keyword Search.
X Enter the first few letters of the city and
street, e.g. NEW and EMP.
While entering the information, the number
of exact matches/all hits is shown.
Destination entry 67

---/--- is displayed if fewer than three X Select an entry: turn and press the control-
characters have been entered. ler.
999+ is displayed if there are too many hits. The address entry menu appears, showing
X Select ok.
the destination address.
The search results are displayed X To start route calculation: select Start .
(Y page 67). X To select a POI: select POIs in the
Vicinity or All POIs by turning and
Selecting search results pressing the controller.
A list appears. The search results are dis-
played according to the linear distance,

Navigation
starting with those closest.
X Select a POI.
The POI is shown.
X To start route calculation: select Start .

X To use online search: select Online


Search by turning and pressing the con-
troller.
The search switches to the online func-
The search results are divided into catego- tions.
ries, such as addresses. The number of Online search requirement (USA): mbrace
exact/total hits is shown in brackets. must be activated for Internet access
Further search results are displayed, if POI (Y page 148).
Search and/or Fuzzy Search are activated Requirement for the online search (Can-
in the search options (Y page 67). ada): a mobile phone must be connected
via Bluetooth® (Y page 114) or USB
(Y page 200) with COMAND.

Selecting search options


X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
X To select Addresses : press the controller. tion or the navigation menu appears.
The search results are displayed. X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
Exact hits are shown at the very top of the list.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
Hits are listed alphabetically. The search term
tion.
that you entered is highlighted in orange in
the entries. X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X Select Keyword Search.

Z
68 Destination entry

X To select Search Options: slide 5, turn X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


and press the controller. the controller.
X Select Fuzzy Search or POI Search. X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Switch the setting on O or off ª. ler.
The error-tolerant search is useful if parts The map displays the current vehicle posi-
of the address are incomplete or the spell- tion or the navigation menu appears.
ing is unclear. X If the navigation menu appears, press the
The POI search takes into account points of controller.
interest in the search. The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
Navigation

Selecting a state/province X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


ler.
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
X To select Destination: turn and press the
the controller.
controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
X Select Keyword Search.
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- X To select Online Search: slide 5, turn
tion or the navigation menu appears. and press the controller.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the The search switches to the online func-
controller. tions.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
Selecting a destination from the list of
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- last destinations
ler.
X To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X Select Keyword Search.
X To select State/Province: slide 5, turn
and press the controller to confirm.
States/provinces are sorted alphabeti-
cally.
X To select a state/province : turn and press
the controller.
COMAND automatically stores the last 50
Searching via COMAND destinations.
Requirement (USA): mbrace must be activa-
ted for Internet access (Y page 148).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone must
be connected via Bluetooth® (Y page 114) or
USB (Y page 200) with COMAND.
Destination entry 69

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


the controller. the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler. ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion. tion.

Navigation
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler. ler.
X To select Destination: turn and press the X To select Destination: turn and press the
controller. controller.
X Select From Previous Destinations. X Select From Contacts.
X Select the destination. X Select the destination.
The address entry menu appears, showing The address entry menu appears, showing
the destination address. the contact and associated destination
X To start route calculation: select Start . address.
X To start route calculation: select Start .

Selecting an address book contact as


a destination Selecting a destination from POIs
Calling up the POI menu

You can select navigable address book con-


tacts as the destination. These are identified
by the L symbol. If you have already entered X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
and saved your home address, you can select the controller.
this as the destination by using My Address. X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.

Z
70 Destination entry

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


ler.
X To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X Select From POIs.
Navigation
Destination entry 71

Defining the position for the POI search

Selection Instructions
Near Destination X Call up the POI menu (Y page 69).
(when route guidance is X To select Near Destination: turn and press the controller.
active) X Select a POI category (Y page 72).

Current Position X Call up the POI menu (Y page 69).


Searches in the vicinity X To select Current Position: turn and press the controller.
of the current vehicle X Select a POI category (Y page 72).

Navigation
position.
Other City Option 1
After entering a city, the X Call up the POI menu (Y page 69).
search is performed X To select Other City: turn and press the controller.
within the city's bounda-
X Select the state/province (Y page 64), if desired.
ries
X Enter the city (Y page 64).
X Select a POI category (Y page 72).

Option 2
X Enter a city in the address entry menu (Y page 64).
X To select POIs: slide 6, turn and press the controller to con-
firm.
X Select a POI category (Y page 72).

Z
72 Destination entry

Selection Instructions
Search By Name X Call up the POI menu (Y page 69).
Searches for all POIs on X To select Search By Name: turn and press the controller.
the digital map or around X Select All POIs or one of the three previously selected posi-
one of the three previ- tions.
ously specified positions The POI list with character bar appears.
X Enter a name.
or
X To select Mercedes-Benz Service: turn and press the con-
Navigation

troller.

Search By Phone Num‐ X Call up the POI menu (Y page 69).


ber X To select Search By Phone Number: turn and press the con-
All POIs with a telephone troller.
number can be selected. You will see a list of phone numbers.
X Enter the telephone number.

The telephone number consists of:


Rthe country code (international dialing code)
Rthe area code
When entering the area code, omit the leading "0"
Rthe telephone number of the participating caller

Selecting a POI category Once the search is completed, the POI list
is displayed.
The search results display the following
information:
Ran arrow that shows the linear direction
to the POI (search around vehicle posi-
tion)
Rthe linear distance to the POI
Rthe name of the POI
X Select a point of interest (Y page 72).
The complete address of the POI is shown.
POI categories appear after selecting the
Near Destination and Current Position
Selecting a POI
menu items or after entering another city.
X Turn and press the controller. Requirement for "Calling up POI": a mobile
The G symbol after an entry shows that phone must be connected to COMAND
further categories are available. (Y page 114).
X Select a sub-category. Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the
The POI search covers a 240 mile (400 km) destination" and "Loading data from the Inter-
radius around the selected position. net" (USA): mbrace must be activated for
Internet access (Y page 148).
Destination entry 73

Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the If Calculate Alternative Routes is


destination" and "Loading data from the Inter- activated (Y page 60), Continue is availa-
net" (Canada): a mobile phone must be con- ble.
nected via Bluetooth® (Y page 114) or USB
(Y page 200) with COMAND. Rotating a 3D POI
Realistically modeled buildings are shown on
the map in an all-round view. These 3D POIs
are sights or buildings of regional importance,
e.g. a main railway station.
3D POIs can be turned on the 20 m, 50 m and

Navigation
100 m map scales. To aid orientation, the
points of the compass are shown while turn-
ing.
X Select a point of interest (Y page 72).
X To select Map: turn and press the controller.
The complete address of the POI is shown.
X Select a 3D POI from the map using Pre‐
X To view the vicinity of the destination:
vious or Next.
select : by turning and pressing the con-
If the 3D POI is marked in gold, you can
troller.
select 3D.
If street images are available, the street in
the vicinity of the destination address is X Select 3D.

shown. The 3D POI turns on its own axis.


X To call up the map: select Map. X To exit the all-round view, press the con-
troller.
X Move the map, change the map scale
(Y page 73) and select the POI.
3D POIs can be displayed in an all-round
Using the map
view (Y page 73)
X To call up a POI: select Call.
If a phone number is available, COMAND
switches to the telephone function.
X To load data from the Internet: select
www.
If an Internet address is available, data is
loaded from the Internet.
X To store a POI: select Save.
The POI can be saved as:
Rhome address : Crosshair
Ra navigable address book contact ; Distance of crosshair position from cur-
(Y page 127) rent vehicle position
Ra personal destination on the SD memory
card (Y page 96)
X To start route calculation: select Start
or Continue by turning and pressing the
controller.

Z
74 Destination entry

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 X To select a destination from the selection


the controller. list: turn and press the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- If the digital map provides navigable
ler. address data, you will see the destination
The map displays the current vehicle posi- address in the address entry menu.
tion or the navigation menu appears. X To start route calculation: select Start .
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- Entering intermediate destinations
tion.
Introduction
Navigation

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


ler. You can also map the route to the destination
yourself by entering up to four intermediate
X To select Destination: turn and press the
destinations. The sequence of the intermedi-
controller.
ate destinations can be changed at any time.
X Select Using Map.
COMAND provides a selection of predefined
The map with crosshair is shown.
destinations in eight categories for this pur-
X To move the map: slide 1, 4 or
pose, e.g. GAS STATION or RESTAURANT. You
2 the controller. can also use the destination entry options to
X To change the map scale: turn the con- enter intermediate destinations.
troller until the desired map scale is selec-
ted. Creating intermediate destinations
The scale is displayed at the bottom.
To enlarge the map: turn the controller
counter-clockwise.
To zoom the map out: turn the controller
clockwise.

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
X To select a destination: press the con- tion or the navigation menu appears.
troller. X If the navigation menu appears, press the
The list contains the Menu menu item. If controller.
several destinations are available in the The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
area around the crosshair, these are also tion.
displayed.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
X To show the menu: press the controller.
ler.
Destination entry 75

X To select Destination: turn and press the Selection Step


controller.
X Select Intermediate Destinations. From POIs X Select a point of inter-
The destination is entered in the intermedi- est (Y page 69).
ate destinations menu.
Using Map X Enter a destination
X To select Add New:: press the controller.
using the map
(Y page 73).

From Memory X Select a personal POI


Card (Y page 81).

Navigation
From X Enter a destination
Mercedes- from Mercedes-Benz
Benz Apps Apps (Y page 77).

Using Geo- X Enter a destination


Coordinates using the geo-coordi-
X To select a POI category or Other : turn and nates (Y page 77).
press the controller.
After selecting one of the eight POI cate-
gories, available POIs are displayed:
Ralong the route
Rin the vicinity
COMAND first searches for destinations on
the route. The search for destinations is
then initiated in the area around the current
vehicle position.
X After selecting Other, select one of the
destination entry options.
X To select a POI: turn the controller and
Selection Step press to confirm.
After selecting a POI or entering a destina-
Address X Enter a destination by
tion, the address of the intermediate des-
Entry address (Y page 63).
tination is displayed.
Keyword X Select a destination by After entering a destination using the map,
Search means of a keyword the address entry menu is displayed. Start
search (Y page 66). is highlighted.

From Previ‐ X Select a destination


ous Destina‐ from the list of last des-
tions tinations (Y page 68).

From Con‐ X Select a contact from


tacts the address book as
the destination
(Y page 69).

Z
76 Destination entry

To call up a map: select Map by turning and To select an intermediate destination in the
Navigation

X X
pressing the controller. intermediate destinations menu: turn and
You can move the map and select the des- press the controller.
tination. A menu appears.
X To make a call: select Call. X To change an intermediate destination:
If the intermediate destination has a tele- select Edit in the menu.
phone number and a mobile phone is con- X Change the address, e.g. the city and
nected to COMAND (Y page 114), the call street.
is connected.
X To select OK: turn and press the controller.
X To load data from the Internet: select
The intermediate destinations menu
www. appears and displays the changed inter-
If an Internet address is available, data is mediate destination.
loaded from the Internet.
You can enter the intermediate destinations
X To store an intermediate destination in
and the destination in any order. To change
the destination memory: select Save
the order, at least one intermediate destina-
(Y page 96).
tion and the destination must be entered.
X To accept an intermediate destination:
X To change the order: in the menu, select
select Start by pressing the controller.
The destination is entered in the intermedi- Move.
ate destinations menu. X Turn the controller and move the intermedi-

If Calculate Alternative Routes is ate destination or destination to the


desired position.
activated (Y page 60), instead of Start,
menu point Continue is available. X Press the controller.

X To delete an intermediate destination:


Editing intermediate destinations select Delete in the menu.
You can perform the following functions:
Accepting intermediate destinations
Rchange intermediate destinations for the route
Rswitch the sequence of the intermediate
destinations in the intermediate destina- X To select Start Route Guidance in the
tions menu intermediate destinations menu: press the
controller.
Rdelete intermediate destinations
The route is calculated with the entered
i You cannot edit POIs. intermediate destinations.
If an intermediate destination was passed
during route guidance, a green tick mark
Destination entry 77

will be entered in the intermediate destina- gas station is transferred to the list and
tions menu. Once the route has been recal- intermediate destination 4 is deleted.
culated, the intermediate destination is
deleted from the intermediate destinations
menu. Entering a destination from
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Saving as a personal route Requirement (USA): mbrace is activated for
You can save a route with intermediate des- the Mercedes-Benz Apps (Y page 148).
tinations on the SD memory card. Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone must
Requirement: the SD memory card is format- be connected via Bluetooth® (Y page 114) or

Navigation
ted using the FAT file system (e.g. FAT32). USB (Y page 200) with COMAND.
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184). X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
X To select Save As Personal Route in the the controller.
intermediate destinations menu: press the X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
controller. ler.
The route is saved on the SD memory card The map displays the current vehicle posi-
under Personal Routes. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
Searching for a gas station when the controller.
fuel level is low The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
Requirement: the setting Gas on Reserve
must be enabled (Y page 61). X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
If the fuel tank reserve level is displayed, you ler.
will see the Reserve Fuel Would you X To select Destination: turn and press the
like to start a search for surround‐ controller.
ing gas stations? message. X Select From Mercedes-Benz Apps.
X To select Yes or No: turn and press the con- The list of Mercedes-Benz Apps appears
troller. (Y page 157).
If you select Yes, the gas station search
starts. When the search is complete, a list
of the gas stations available along the route Using geo-coordinates
or in the vicinity is displayed.
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
If you select No, the search is canceled.
the controller.
X Select the gas station.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
The address of the gas station is displayed.
ler.
X To select Start: press the controller.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
The selected gas station is entered into tion or the navigation menu appears.
position 1 of the intermediate destinations
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
menu. Route guidance begins.
controller.
If the intermediate destinations menu The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
already contains four intermediate desti- tion.
nations, a prompt will be displayed, asking
you whether you wish to enter the gas sta-
tion into position 1. If you select Yes, the

Z
78 Personal POIs and routes

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- Standard entry for personal POIs
ler. RMercedes-Benz Apps
X To select Destination: turn and press the Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that
controller. you have imported via the online functions
X Select Using Geo-Coordinates. (Y page 158)
Geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) RCategories which you have created your-
are entered in degrees, minutes and sec- self, e.g. on your PC
onds. Personal routes are not categorized.
X To enter geo-coordinates: turn the con-
troller.
Navigation

The value for degree, minute or second Settings for personal POIs
changes. Displaying on the map
X To move the selection within the line: slide
1 the controller.
X To move the selection between lines: slide
4 the controller.
X To confirm the value: press the controller.

X To store geo-coordinates: select Save by


turning and pressing the controller.
The destination with the geo-coordinates
can be stored as:
Ra home address in the address book
Ra navigable address book contact Requirements: an SD memory card with per-
For further information on the address sonal POIs is inserted (Y page 184).
book, see (Y page 127) The SD memory card is formatted using the
Ra personal destination on the SD memory FAT file system (e.g. FAT32).
card (Y page 96) All personal POIs of the selected category are
displayed on the map with a corresponding
X To start route calculation: select Start symbol.
Route Guidance by turning and pressing
If the "Alert when approaching" function is
the controller.
activated (Y page 79) the symbols are dis-
played up to a map scale of 2 km.
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
Personal POIs and routes
the controller.
General notes X To select Navi, turn and press the control-

The use of personal POIs for displaying traffic ler.


surveillance equipment is not permitted in The map displays the current vehicle posi-
every country. Please observe the country- tion or the navigation menu appears.
specific regulations and always drive at a suit- X If the navigation menu appears, press the
able speed. controller.
Personal POIs are filed in categories: The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
RNot Classified
Personal POIs and routes 79

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
ler. the controller.
X To select Options, turn and press the con- X To select Navi, turn and press the control-
troller. ler.
X Select Personal POIs. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
X Select Display on the Map.
tion or the navigation menu appears.
The menu displays the categories available X If the navigation menu appears, press the
on the SD memory card. controller.
X To select a category: turn the controller
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
and press to confirm. tion.

Navigation
All personal POIs in the selected category X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
are displayed O or not displayed ª, ler.
depending on the previous status. X To select Options, turn and press the con-
troller.
Alert when approaching X Select Personal POIs.
X Select Approaching POI Cue.
The menu displays the categories available
on the SD memory card.
X Select Audible or Optical.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
X To select a category: turn the controller
and press to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª, for
all personal POIs of this category, depend-
Requirements: an SD memory card with per- ing on the previous setting.
sonal POIs is inserted (Y page 184).
The SD memory card is formatted using the
FAT file system (e.g. FAT32). Saving personal POIs and routes
If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI, General notes
this is highlighted on the map and/or an audi-
ble signal sounds. Personal POIs and routes are geodata which
For this purpose both the corresponding func- are saved in the open GPX (GPS Exchange)
tion Approaching POI Cue, and the cate- format on the SD memory card.
gory containing the personal POI must be Requirement: the SD memory card is format-
activated. ted using the FAT file system (e.g. FAT32).

Personal POI from current vehicle posi-


tion or crosshair position
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184).

Z
80 Personal POIs and routes

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 X Enter the name.


the controller. X Select a category.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- The current address is saved as a personal
ler. point of interest on the SD memory card.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears. i You can select a destination from the
From Previous Destinations or From
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
Contacts memories and save it on the SD
controller.
memory card.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
RFrom Previous Destinations
tion.
(Y page 68)
Navigation

XWhen the map is displayed, press the con- RFrom Contacts (Y page 69)
troller until a message appears.
The current vehicle position is saved to the
Personal route from a tour including
Not Classified category on the SD mem- intermediate destinations
ory card and also stored in the "Last desti-
nations" memory (Y page 97). X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184).
If the "Move map" function is selected X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
(Y page 60), the crosshair position is saved. the controller.
i If no SD memory card is inserted, the per- X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
sonal POI will only be stored in the "Last ler.
destinations" memory. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears.
Personal POI from destination address X If the navigation menu appears, press the
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184). controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 tion.
the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
X Enter a destination, e.g. by address
ler. (Y page 64).
The map displays the current vehicle posi- X Start route calculation (Y page 65).
tion or the navigation menu appears. X Enter an intermediate destination
X If the navigation menu appears, press the (Y page 74).
controller. X Select Save As Personal Route in the
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- intermediate destinations menu.
tion. The route is saved in the Personal Routes
folder on the SD memory card.
X Call up the address entry menu and enter
the destination address (Y page 63).
X Select Save by sliding 6 the controller.
Importing personal destinations and
X Turn and press the controller. routes via Mercedes-Benz Apps
X To select To Memory Card: turn and press
the controller. You can use Mercedes-Benz Apps (e.g. Down-
load POI, Local Search) to import destinations
to navigation (Y page 156). These have their
own symbol and are filed in the Mercedes-
Benz Apps category.
Personal POIs and routes 81

You can save the imported destinations and X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
routes as personal POIs and routes ler.
(Y page 79). X To select Destination: turn and press the
When importing routes, please note: controller.
RThe Mercedes-Benz Apps may generate a X Select From Memory Card.
route based on a different map from the The menu displays the categories available
one used by COMAND. Points on the route on the SD memory card.
may therefore be situated off the digital X To select a category or Personal Routes:
roads. For this reason an imported route turn and press the controller.
commenced in COMAND may deviate from The available personal POIs or route entries

Navigation
the original route from the Mercedes-Benz are displayed.
Apps. X Select personal POI or personal route.
RThe Mercedes-Benz Apps minimize the The address of the personal POI appears or
number of route points offered. For this the personal route is displayed in the map.
reason an imported route commenced in If a large number of entries are stored, a reg-
COMAND may deviate from the original ister for quick selection appears. Personal
route from the Mercedes-Benz Apps. POIs and routes can be saved and sorted with
different character sets (e. g. Latin, Cyrillic,
Arabic).
Selecting and editing personal POIs
and routes X To select a register: slide 9 the con-
troller.
Selecting X To select a character: turn and press the
controller.
X To select a character set for sorting:
slide 9 the controller to select B.
X Press the controller.
The available character sets are displayed.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Turn and press the controller.

Editing
The example shows a personal POI.
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184).
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. The example shows a personal route.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
X Select personal POI or personal route
tion.
(Y page 81).

Z
82 Personal POIs and routes

X To explore a personal POI or personal Recording the route


route: turn and press the controller to
select Map. General notes
The map with the crosshair appears and Routes are recorded on the SD memory card.
shows the destination.
Requirement: the SD memory card is format-
X Scroll the map (Y page 60).
ted using the FAT file system (e.g. FAT32).
X Set the map scale (Y page 98).
When recording the route, bear in mind the
X To switch to the menu: press the % but- following:
ton. Rif the SD memory card is inserted, it must
X To call the personal POI: turn and press not be removed during recording.
Navigation

the controller to select Call. Rif route recording is started manually, it


If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND must be finished manually before COMAND
and the telephone number is available, the is switched off (e. g. when the engine is
call is connected (Y page 120). switched off).
X To save a personal POI: turn and press the RCOMAND minimizes the number of route
controller to select Save. points recorded. Therefore when the recor-
X To continue saving (Y page 96).
ded route is subsequently commenced, it
may differ from the route that was originally
X To edit the name and symbol: turn and recorded.
press the controller to select Edit.
X Select Change Name or Edit Icon. Starting/finishing route recording
X Character entry (Y page 32).
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184).
X Select a symbol.
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
X To delete a personal POI or route: turn the controller.
and press the controller to select Delete. X To select Navi, turn and press the control-
A prompt will appear. ler.
X Select Yes or No. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
If you select Yes, the personal destination tion or the navigation menu appears.
or personal route is deleted. X If the navigation menu appears, press the
X To select the outward and return controller.
routes: turn and press the controller to The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
select Swap. tion.
The starting and destination positions of X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
your personal route, and thus the direction ler.
for route guidance, are switched round.
X To select Destination, turn and press the
One-way streets or restricted intersections
controller.
are taken into consideration. Therefore, the
X Select From Memory Card.
outward and return routes may differ from
each other. X Select Start Route Recording.
The route is recorded and REC appears at
X To start route guidance: turn and press
the bottom edge of the screen.
the controller to select Start.
Route guidance 83

X To stop recording, select End Route Route guidance


Recording from the menu.
The route is stored under Personal General notes
Routes. COMAND calculates the route to the destina-
tion without taking account of the following,
Displaying/editing the recorded route for example:
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184). Rtraffic lights
Rstop and yield signs
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
Rparking or stopping restrictions
the controller.
Rroad narrowing

Navigation
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler. Rtemporary traffic rules and regulations
The map displays the current vehicle posi- Navigation may give differing driving recom-
tion or the navigation menu appears. mendations if the actual street/traffic situa-
X If the navigation menu appears, press the tion does not correspond with the digital
controller. map's data. For example, if the road layout or
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- the direction of a one-way street has been
tion. changed.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- For this reason, you must always observe
road and traffic rules and regulations during
ler.
your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
X To select Destination: turn and press the
ulations always have priority over system
controller. driving recommendations.
X Select From Memory Card.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
X Select Personal Routes. calculated (Y page 65).
Previously recorded routes are displayed. COMAND guides you to your destination by
X To select a route, turn and press the con- means of navigation announcements in the
troller. form of audible navigation announcements
The map appears with a menu. The recor- and route guidance displays.
ded route is shown on the map in blue. The route guidance displays can be seen if
X To calculate a route: select Start. navigation mode is switched on.
If you do not follow the navigation announce-
X To change the name and symbol: select
ments or if you leave the calculated route,
Edit.
COMAND automatically calculates a new
X Select Change Name or Edit Icon.
route to the destination.
X Character entry (Y page 32).
If the digital map contains the corresponding
X Select a symbol. information, the following applies:
Rduring route guidance, COMAND tries to
avoid roads with restricted access. Those
roads, for example, that are closed to
through-traffic.
Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
considered for route guidance on days
when they are open. For this purpose, the

Z
84 Route guidance

relevant times must be correctly stored in 3D image of the imminent change of direction
the database. is shown on the right side of the display.

Change-of-direction phase
Change of direction
Overview
Changes of direction have three phases:
RPreparation phase
RAnnouncement phase
Navigation

RChange-of-direction phase
Changes in direction are also shown in the
multifunction display of the instrument clus-
ter (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
COMAND announces an imminent change of
Preparation phase direction. The change of direction is
announced ahead of time, e.g. with the
COMAND prepares you for the upcoming announcement "Now turn right".
change of direction, e.g. with the announce-
The display is split in two like in the announce-
ment "Prepare to turn right". You see the full-
ment phase.
screen map.
The change of direction is performed when
Announcement phase the light-color bar on the right drops down to
0 ft and the current vehicle position symbol
has reached the white change-of-direction
point.
When the change of direction is completed,
the map will appear in full screen mode again.

Display on highways

: Next road or direction


; Point at which the change of direction
takes place (white dot)
= Change of direction (turn right here)
? Distance to the next change of direction
COMAND announces the imminent change of
direction. The change of direction is The image shows an example of route guid-
announced ahead of time, such as with the ance at a highway intersection when driving
announcement "Turn right in 200 meters". on a highway.
The display is now split into two sectors. The
map is shown on the left side of the display,
and a detailed image of the intersection or a
Route guidance 85

Lane recommendations Approaching new lanes


Display on multi-lane roads

Navigation
: Approaching new lane

: Lanes not recommended (dark gray)


During the change of direction, new lanes
may be added. These will be shown in the dis-
; Possible lane (light gray)
play of lane recommendations with a lower
= Recommended lanes (white) boundary line.
If the digital map contains the relevant data,
COMAND can display lane recommendations
on multilane roads for the next change of Highway information
direction.
Display mode
Lane not recommended :: you will not be
able to complete the next change of direction
if you stay in this lane.
Possible lane ;: you will only be able to com-
plete the next change of direction in this lane.
Recommended lane =: in this lane you will
be able to complete the next change of direc-
tion and the one after that.
COMAND shows the lane recommendations
for the next two changes of direction. Lane
recommendations are also shown in the mul-
tifunction display of the instrument cluster Requirement: the Highway Information
(see the vehicle Operator's Manual). map content must be enabled (Y page 100).
While driving on the highway, gas stations,
rest stops, rest areas and highway exits are
displayed along with their immediate distan-
ces from the current vehicle position.

Z
86 Route guidance

Calling up the selection mode Using the traffic jam function


Navigation

X When highway information is displayed, Highway information enables the use of the
slide 9 the controller. traffic jam function. The remaining route on
The marker is on the highway information. the highway in this case is blocked in the
The associated position is highlighted on direction of travel from the selected exit.
the map. X To select Detour: turn and press the con-
X To select the desired rest stop/freeway troller.
exit: turn and press the controller. The traffic jam function appears
The available POIs are displayed. (Y page 89).

Starting route guidance to a POI


Destination reached

X To select a POI: turn the controller and


press to confirm. Once the destination is reached, you will see
The POI details are displayed. the checkered flag. Route guidance is fin-
You can perform the following functions: ished.
Rstore in the address book (Y page 96)
Rview on the map (Y page 101) Navigation announcements
Rcalled if a phone is connected and a
Repeating navigation announcements
phone number is available (Y page 120).
Rselect for route guidance and a route to it If you missed the current navigation
calculated (Y page 65). announcement, you can call it up again.
Route guidance 87

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 Canceling/continuing route guidance


the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Canceling route guidance
ler. X Slide 6 the controller.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- The menu is shown.
tion or the navigation menu appears. X To select Destination: turn and press the
X If the navigation menu appears, press the controller.
controller. X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- The blue route line is no longer shown on
tion. the map.

Navigation
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler. Resuming route guidance
X To select +: turn and press the controller.
The navigation announcement is repeated.
i If the Repeat Spoken Driving Recom‐
mendations function has previously been
added as a favorite, you can alternatively
select the function using the favorites but-
ton (Y page 35).

Setting the volume manually


XDuring a navigation announcement, turn
X Slide 6 the controller.
the control knob. The menu is shown.
i When you start the engine, the volume is X To select Destination: turn and press the
set to the lowest setting. controller.
X Select Continue Route Guidance.
Switching navigation announcements COMAND calculates the route.
on/off
X To switch off navigation announce-
ments: press the 8 button on the mul- Route information
tifunction steering wheel during a naviga-
tion message. Destination information
X To switch navigation announcements
back on: slide 6 the controller.
X To select +: turn and press the controller.
COMAND automatically switches the naviga-
tion announcements back on when:
Ra new route is calculated.
Ryou switch COMAND on again or start the
engine.
A navigation message is given if the route is
recalculated during dynamic route guidance
due to new traffic reports (Y page 91).
Z
88 Route guidance

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 Take alternative route


the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
Navigation

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


ler. If the Calculate Alternative Routes set-
X To select Route: turn and press the con- ting is activated O, different routes will be
troller. offered each time a route is calculated
X Select Destination Information.
(Y page 61).
The destination and existing intermediate You can call up alternative routes to the cur-
destinations are displayed with distances, rent route.
travel time and arrival time. Routes 1, 2 and 4 are displayed with a dark
X To select destination or intermediate blue line.
destination: turn and press the controller. Route 3 is the most economic route and is
The address appears. displayed with a green line.
X Select Save. X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
The destination or intermediate destination the controller.
can be saved as: X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Ras a navigable address book contact ler.
Rhome address The map displays the current vehicle posi-
X To call up the map, select Map. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
X Move the map, change the map scale and
select the destination or the intermediate controller.
destination (Y page 73). The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X To call the destination or intermediate des-
tination, select Call. X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
If a phone is connected and a phone num- ler.
ber is available, COMAND switches to the X To select Route: turn and press the con-
telephone function. troller.
X Select Alternative Route.
Route 1 is shown.
X To display additional routes: select Next or
Previous.
X To start a new route guidance: select
Start.
Route guidance 89

Route list Where am I?

Navigation
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
the controller. the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler. ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion. tion.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler. ler.
X To select Route: turn and press the con- X To select Position: turn and press the
troller. controller.
X Select Route List. X Select Where am I?.
The route list shows the next change of The street you are currently on and the pre-
direction and the immediate distances vious and next intersections are displayed.
from the current vehicle position.
X To display additional route sections:
turn the controller. Traffic jam function
The position of the change of direction that
belongs to the respective route section is
indicated on the map with a cross.

Z
90 Route guidance

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 may be of varying conditions and their appro-
the controller. priateness for use may be affected by various
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- factors such as time of day, time of year and
ler. immediate weather conditions that cannot be
The map displays the current vehicle posi- judged or taken into consideration by the
tion or the navigation menu appears. COMAND system.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. Route guidance to an off-road destina-
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- tion
tion. COMAND can guide you to destinations
Navigation

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- which are within the area of the digital map,
ler. but which are not themselves on the map.
X To select Route: turn and press the con- These destinations are known as off-road
troller. destinations, which you can enter using the
map, for example. In these cases, COMAND
X Select Detour.
guides you for as long as possible with navi-
X To specify the start of the traffic jam
gation announcements and displays on roads
section: select Beginning. known to the system.
The next possible traffic jam section start-
If the vehicle reaches an area which is not part
ing point is marked.
of the digital map, the display appears as a
X Turn the controller. split-screen view. On the right, an arrow
The marking moves along the route to the appears that points to the off-road destina-
next starting position. tion. You hear the announcement: "Please
X Press the controller. follow the arrow on the display". As the vehi-
The start of the traffic jam is set. cle approaches the destination, you will see a
X To specify the end of a traffic jam sec- display to this effect.
tion: select End.
The next possible traffic jam section end Route guidance from an off-road loca-
point is marked. tion to a destination
X Turn the controller.
Off-road location: the vehicle's position is on
The marking moves along the route to the the digital map, but the map does not contain
next end position. any information about that location.
X Press the controller. COMAND is able to guide you to a destination
The end of the traffic jam is determined. even from an off-road location.
X To calculate the detour: select Start. At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Road Not Mapped message, an arrow and
the distance to the destination. The arrow
Off-road shows the compass heading to the actual
destination.
General notes As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
The COMAND navigation system may direct known to the system, route guidance contin-
you to off-road routes that your vehicle may ues in the usual way.
not be capable of traversing through without
damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is
the driver’s sole responsibility to determine
the suitability of the route. Off-road routes
Real-time traffic reports 91

Off-road during route guidance COMAND can show certain traffic incidents
on the map with symbols (type of incident)
Due to road works, for example, there may be
and colored lines (extent). Traffic reports are
differences between the data on the digital
shown on the map at scales of 1/32 mi to
map and the actual course of the road.
20 mi.
In such cases, the system will temporarily be
When : is displayed, traffic reports can be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the
received or traffic reports are available. If it is
digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-
not displayed, no reception is possible.
road position.
X To hide the menu: slide 5 and press the
In the display, you will then see the Road Not
Mapped message, an arrow and the distance controller.

Navigation
to the destination. The direction arrow shows The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-
the compass heading to the destination. play.
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle X To set the map scale: turn the controller
position to the map again, route guidance until the desired map scale is selected.
continues in the usual way.

Real-time traffic reports


Prerequisites
This function is currently not available for
Canada.
In order to receive real-time traffic reports via
satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIR-
IUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Ser-
vice. : Traffic jam on the route
Further information on satellite radio ; Slow-moving traffic on the route
(Y page 172). = Road blocked
COMAND can receive traffic reports via sat- ? Traffic disruption
ellite radio and take account of these for A Traffic warning
route guidance in the navigation system. B Dashed red and white line delimiting the
Received traffic reports are displayed on the traffic warning
map either as text or as symbols. C Road block (crosses along the affected
road)
D Slow-moving traffic (orange line along the
Real-time traffic reports on the map
affected route)
E Traffic jam (red line along the affected
route)

Z
92 Real-time traffic reports

Displaying real-time traffic reports Traffic symbol information


Starting a search for traffic reports
Navigation

: Affected roads with indication of direction


; Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 message
the controller. X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
the controller.
ler. X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
ler.
tion or the navigation menu appears.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
tion or the navigation menu appears.
controller. X If the navigation menu appears, press the
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
controller.
tion.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- tion.
ler. X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
X To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
ler.
troller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
If satellite signals cannot be received or
troller.
there are no traffic reports, you will see a
X To select Traffic Symbol Information:
message to this effect.
turn and press the controller.
X To close the report: press the controller. The map appears and shows the available
traffic information as icons. The first traffic
information is highlighted.
X To highlight additional traffic symbols,
select Next or Previous.
X To move the map: select Map.
You can move the map to enable further
traffic information to be displayed.
Real-time traffic reports 93

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
You can have the traffic report relevant to a

Navigation
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
traffic icon shown.
ler.
X To select Details: turn and press the con-
X To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
troller.
The report shows the following information: X To select Messages On Route: turn and
RState/province, road and display of the press the controller.
affected direction The traffic report window appears. Several
RSection of the road to which the traffic traffic reports may be available for the cal-
report applies culated route, marked for example by 1/3.
RTraffic icon and traffic report The report shows the following information:
X To close the detailed display: press the RState/province, road and display of the
% button. affected direction
RSection of the road to which the traffic
Displaying reports on the route report applies
RTraffic icon and traffic report

X To display the next/previous traffic


report: turn the controller.
X To close the display: press the % but-
ton.

Displaying all traffic reports

The function is only available while route guid-


ance is active. It shows the available traffic
reports affecting the current route.
If there are no reports for the route or the
function is not supported in the selected lan-
guage: the Messages On Route menu item is
gray and cannot be selected.

Z
94 Real-time traffic reports

X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


the controller. the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler. ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion. tion.
Navigation

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler. ler.
X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- X To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller. troller.
X To select All Messages: turn and press X To select Traffic Information On Map:
the controller. turn and press the controller.
A list is shown containing all roads, areas or X Select Incidents, Speed & Flow or Free
regions affected by traffic reports. Roads, Flow.
areas or regions not on the route also The display is on O or off ª.
appear in the list.
X To select the road, area or region: turn
the controller and press to confirm. Reading out traffic reports on the
The traffic report is displayed (Y page 93). route
There may be several traffic reports for the
Introduction
affected road.
X To close the display: press the % but- The read-aloud function is only available while
ton. route guidance is active. It reads out traffic
reports affecting the current route.
Settings for the display on the map You can select from the following text reader
properties:
You can switch these displays on/off on the
RLanguage (Y page 45)
map:
RText reader speed (Y page 41)
RIncidents
You can start the text reader function man-
RSpeed & Flow ually or set it to automatic.
RFree Flow
Storing destinations 95

Starting the text reader function man- X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ually ler.
X To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
the controller. troller.
X Select Read Traffic Announcements
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler. Automatically.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- Depending on the previous state, switch
tion or the navigation menu appears. the option on O or off ª.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.

Navigation
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- Recalculating the route dynamically
tion. The Dynamic Traffic Route route type
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- takes into account all of the traffic reports it
ler. receives for the current route when calculat-
ing the route (Y page 60).
X To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller. If you have selected Dynamic Traffic
Route as the route type, COMAND guides you
X Select Read Out All Messages on
to your destination along the updated route.
Route.
COMAND reads out the reports in
sequence. Storing destinations
If there are no reports for the route, the
Read Out All Messages on Route menu General notes
item is gray and cannot be selected. If a route to a destination has been calculated,
X To cancel the read-aloud function: select COMAND saves the destination to the last
Cancel Read-Aloud Function. destinations memory. If the memory is full,
COMAND reads out the current report and COMAND overwrites the oldest destination.
then exits the read-aloud function. When you save the current vehicle position or
a crosshair position, this position is stored in
Automatic read-aloud function the "Last destinations" memory.
You can save destinations permanently in the
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 address book and on an SD memory card. For
the controller. instance, this is possible immediately after
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- entering an address.
ler. Requirement: the SD memory card is format-
The map displays the current vehicle posi- ted using the FAT file system (e.g. FAT32).
tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.

Z
96 Storing destinations

Storing the destination in the address If the contact already has two destination
book addresses, a prompt will appear asking if a
destination address should be overwritten.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, a list showing both des-
tination addresses appears.
X To select the destination address: turn and
press the controller.
The destination address is overwritten.
Navigation

Saving destination to the SD memory


card
The example shows a POI.
X To select Save: turn and press the control- X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184).
ler. X Display a point of interest, for example
A menu appears. (Y page 96).
X To select Save: turn and press the control-
X New contact: select As New Contact.
If the address book already contains con- ler.
tacts, the entry Add to Contact is also A menu appears.
available. X Select To Memory Card.

X Select Not Classified, Home or Work. X Not Classified or, if available, select a
An input menu shows the destination category that you have created yourself.
address. An input menu appears.
X Enter a surname and first name. Character X Enter a surname and first name. Character
entry (Y page 32). entry (Y page 33).
X To select OK: turn and press the controller. X Select OK.

The Saving Successful message The Saving Successful message


appears. The destination address is saved appears. The destination is saved to the SD
in the address book as a navigable contact. memory card.
X To add to a contact: select Add to Con‐
tact. Saving the current vehicle position
The address book appears.
X Search for a contact (Y page 128). X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
X Press the controller.
the controller.
The Saving Successful message X To select Navi: turn and press the control-

appears. The destination address is alloca- ler.


ted to a contact in the address book. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
Telephone numbers are not transferred to tion or the navigation menu appears.
the telephone number fields of the address X If the navigation menu appears, press the

book. After selecting the destination controller.


address from the address book for naviga- The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion, the associated telephone number will tion.
be displayed.
Storing destinations 97

X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
ler. the controller.
X To select Position: turn and press the X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
controller. ler.
X Select Save. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
The current vehicle position is saved in tion or the navigation menu appears.
"Last destinations". X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
Saving the crosshair position tion.

Navigation
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
the controller. ler.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- X To select Destination: turn and press the
ler. controller.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- X Select From Previous Destinations.
tion or the navigation menu appears. The "Last destinations" memory appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the X To save the destination: select the desti-
controller. nation.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- The destination address appears.
tion. X Store the destination in the address book
X To display the crosshair: press the con- (Y page 96).
troller. Save a destination to the SD memory card
X Move the map to the desired position (Y page 96)
(Y page 60). X To view the details: while in the "Last des-
X To show the menu: press the controller. tinations" memory, turn the controller and
X To select Position: turn and press the highlight the entry.
controller. X Slide 9 the controller.
X Select Save. A menu appears.
The crosshair position is saved in the last X To select Details: press the controller.
destinations. i The destination address can be changed if
desired. For instance, a different street or
house number can be selected.
Editing the last destinations X To delete one or all destinations: while in
the "Last destinations" memory, turn the
controller and highlight the entry.
X Slide 9 the controller.
A menu appears.
X To select Delete or Delete All: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears.
X Select Yes or No.
Selecting Yes deletes the selected desti-
nation or all destinations.

Z
98 Map functions

Map functions Selecting map orientation


General notes
Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
locations of these companies. The use of such
logos on the map does not indicate approval
of, support of or advertising by these compa-
nies for the navigation system itself.
Navigation

i Alternatively, you can carry out this oper-


ation using the touchpad (Y page 25). X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Map settings ler.
Setting the map scale The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears.
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, X If the navigation menu appears, press the
the menu is faded out (Y page 59). controller.
The lower left-hand section of the map shows The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
the currently set map scale and compass nee- tion.
dle.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
Right-hand-drive vehicles: the currently set
ler.
map scale and compass needle are displayed
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
in the lower right-hand section of the map.
troller.
X To show the map in full screen mode: to
X Select Map Orientation.
hide the menu, push the % button.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
or
X Turn and press the controller.
X Slide the controller to the center of the map
The map orientation is set.
and press to confirm.
X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
the controller, the scale bar appears on the
bottom of the display.
X Turn the controller until the needle points
to the desired map scale.
Once you are finished selecting a map
scale, the new map scale will be shown.

The image is an example of the 3D map dis-


play with crosshair.
Map functions 99

Map orien- Explanation X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


tation ler.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
North Up 0 The map view is displayed troller.
so that north is always up. X Select Map Content.
Heading ¤ The map view is aligned to X Select POI Symbols On Map.
Up the direction of travel. The The # dot indicates the current setting.
direction of travel is always X Turn and press the controller.
at the top; the red tip of the Default Symbols shows symbols of pre-
symbol points north. defined categories in the map.

Navigation
3-D Map ¤ The map view is aligned to Custom Symbols allows symbols to be
the direction of travel. The selected from other/all available catego-
map displays a 3D oblique ries.
view with elevation; the red X Turn and press the controller.
tip of the symbol points You have the option of selecting symbols to
north. be displayed O or not displayed ª on the
map.
Selecting POI symbols on the map The list shows all symbols that are contained
on the digital map across all countries. How-
ever, not all points of interest are available in
all countries. As a result, certain point of
interest symbols may not be displayed on the
map, even if the symbol display is switched
on.

Selecting text information on the map


At the bottom of the display, you can specify
whether to display geo-coordinates or not to
POIs can be displayed as symbols in the map display text information for the street you are
display. POIs include, for example, gas sta- currently on.
tions, hotels and restaurants. X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5 the controller.
the controller. X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
X To select Navi: turn and press the control- ler.
ler. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
The map displays the current vehicle posi- tion or the navigation menu appears.
tion or the navigation menu appears. X If the navigation menu appears, press the
X If the navigation menu appears, press the controller.
controller. The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- tion.
tion. X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.

Z
100 Map functions

X Select Map Content. X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


X Select Text Information On Map. the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting. X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
X Turn and press the controller. ler.
Current Street shows the current street The map displays the current vehicle posi-
at the bottom of the display. tion or the navigation menu appears.
Geo-coordinates shows the longitude X If the navigation menu appears, press the
and latitude, elevation and number of sat- controller.
ellites received. The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
The elevation shown may deviate from the tion.
Navigation

actual elevation. X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


X Turn and press the controller. ler.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
Switching highway information on/off troller.
X Select Map Content.
The following can be displayed when driving
on a highway: X Select Next Intersecting Street.
Switch the display in the map on O or off
Rthe nearest gas stations and rest stops ª.
Rrest areas and highway exits
and their present distances from the vehi- Showing the map version
cle's current position (Y page 85)
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
The number of the map data version is shown.
Information about new versions of the digital
the controller.
map can be obtained from an authorized
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Mercedes-Benz Center.
ler.
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion or the navigation menu appears. the controller.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. ler.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- The map displays the current vehicle posi-
tion. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control- controller.
ler. The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
X To select Options: turn and press the con- tion.
troller.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
X Select Map Content.
ler.
X Select Highway Information.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
Switch the display in the map on O or off
troller.
ª. Further information (Y page 85).
X Select Map Content.
X Select Map Version.
Displaying the next crossroads
Information on the current map version is
If route guidance is not active, the next cross- shown.
roads can be displayed at the upper edge of
the display.
Map functions 101

Rotating the 3D map Map display


Displaying the navigation map

Navigation
You can use this function to explore the vicin-
ity of the destination in a 3D view. The func-
tion is available in all map scales. COMAND displays the navigation map and
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
globe satellite images. This allows for a real-
istic map display free from distortion in all
the controller.
map scales.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
Other functions:
ler.
The map displays the current vehicle posi- RMoving the map (Y page 60)
tion or the navigation menu appears. RChanging the map scale (Y page 98)
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller. Building images
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X To select Position: turn and press the
controller.
X Select 3D Map Rotation.
X Turn the controller to change to the 3D map
perspective.
Additional functions: In small map scales (20 m, 50 m), important
RMoving the map (Y page 60) buildings are depicted realistically on the
map; other buildings are shown as models.

Elevation model
The example shows a realistic depiction with
elevation modeling.

Country-specific information
You can call up information on the traffic con-
ditions in the country you are currently driving

Z
102 Map functions

in via the COMAND Internet and online func- The calculated route may include an area to
tion. be avoided if:
The availability of information is country- Ryour destination is located in such an area.
dependent. Information can include maxi- Rthere is no alternative route of comparable
mum speeds, driving with low-beam head- length available
lamps or legal alcohol limits, for example.
Highways within blocked areas are always
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
taken into consideration in the route calcula-
the controller. tion.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ler.
i Alternatively, you can carry out this oper-
ation using the touchpad (Y page 25).
Navigation

The map displays the current vehicle posi-


tion or the navigation menu appears.
Avoiding a new area
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X To select Position: turn and press the
controller.
X Select Country Information.
When the online connection has been
established, the available country informa- X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
tion appears. the controller.
i Alternatively you can call up this function X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
using the touchpad (Y page 25). ler.
X To return to navigation: press the % The map displays the current vehicle posi-
button. tion or the navigation menu appears.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
controller.
Avoiding an area The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
General notes
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
COMAND enables you to avoid areas you do ler.
not wish to drive through. X To select Options: turn and press the con-
If you activate or deactivate a route block troller.
while route guidance is active, COMAND will X Select Route Settings.
calculate a new route. If you activate or deac-
X Select Avoid Options.
tivate a route block while route guidance is
inactive, COMAND will use the new setting for X Select Avoid Area.

the next route guidance.


Map functions 103

X Select Avoid New Area. X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


A menu appears. the controller.
X Select Using Map or Address Entry. X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
If you select Using Map, the map with ler.
crosshair appears. The map displays the current vehicle posi-
When you have selected Address Entry tion or the navigation menu appears.
the address entry menu appears X If the navigation menu appears, press the
(Y page 63). The map appears with the controller.
crosshair after the address is entered. The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.

Navigation
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X Select Route Settings.
X Select Avoid Options.
X Select Avoid Area.
A list appears.
X To select an area: when the map with X To switch an area to avoid on/off: select
crosshair appears, press the controller. an area by turning and pressing the con-
A red square appears on the map, symbol- troller.
izing the area to be blocked. The area will be avoided O or not ª.
X To change the size of the area, turn the X To display/change an area: mark an area
controller. by turning the controller.
The map scale is shown at the bottom of the X Slide 9 the controller.
display. The needle points to the map scale
X To select Display/Change: press the con-
currently selected.
troller.
X When the desired size is set, press the con-
The map with the crosshair appears.
troller.
The area currently blocked is displayed as a
The area is entered into the list.
red square.
Turning Area on/off and displaying/ X To move the area to a new location: slide
changing the area 1, 4, 2 the controller.
X To change the size of the area: press the
controller.
X Turn the controller.
X To accept changes: press the controller.
A message appears stating that the area
has been set.

Z
104 Map functions

Deleting one/all areas X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5


the controller.
X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
the controller.
ler.
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
ler.
tion or the navigation menu appears.
The map displays the current vehicle posi-
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
tion or the navigation menu appears.
controller.
X If the navigation menu appears, press the
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
controller.
tion.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
Navigation

tion. X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-


ler.
X To show the menu: slide 6 the control-
X To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
ler.
troller.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
X Select SIRIUS Service.
troller.
The provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM)
X Select Route Settings.
and the serial number of your service mod-
X Select Avoid Options.
ule are displayed.
X Select Avoid Area.
i Alternatively you can call up this function
A list appears. using the touchpad (Y page 25).
X To delete an area: mark an area by turning
the controller. Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic
X Slide 9 the controller. report service
X Select Delete or Delete All.
XCall the provider telephone number shown
A prompt appears asking whether you wish on the COMAND display.
to delete the area.
i You can also have the satellite service
X Select Yes or No.
activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS
After selecting Yes, the area is deleted. XM Radio website at
X To delete all areas: when the list appears, http://www.sirius.com (USA).
slide 9 the controller.
Once the connection has been established:
X Select Delete All.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
X Follow the service employee's instructions.
to delete all areas. The activation process may take up to
10 minutes.
X Select Yes or No.
After selecting Yes, all areas are deleted. If registration is not included when purchas-
ing the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
SIRIUS XM service
Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa- Updating the digital map
tion
Introduction
You can display the SIRIUS XM service infor-
mation. The digital maps generated by the map soft-
ware become outdated in the same way as
conventional road maps. Optimal route guid-
Navigation functions 105

ance can only be provided by the navigation Carrying out a manual update
system in conjunction with the most up-to-
After the free update of the map data has
date map software.
expired or when buying map data, you can
Information about new versions of the digital update the data yourself.
map can be obtained from an authorized
The update process may take some time (up
Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the dig-
to 45 minutes), depending on the size of the
ital map updated there using a data medium,
digital map. The update will be completed
or you can update it yourself.
more quickly if the vehicle is stationary. If you
For North American countries, it is possible to start the update with the engine switched off
update the map data for COMAND free of and the starter battery has insufficient power,
charge for a period of three years. Information

Navigation
COMAND may automatically switch off. This
on the availability of this service for your vehi- protects the battery. In order to prevent this,
cle can be obtained from your authorized a suitable power supply to the vehicle must be
Mercedes-Benz Center. maintained.
Entitlement to the free update
For the first three years after your vehicle is Navigation functions
registered, you are entitled to all available Calling up the navigation system
updates to the map software for COMAND. menu
They are usually installed during a regular
vehicle service. After this period, you can pur-
chase further updates from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The free updates relate to the vehicle and not
to an individual. If there is a change of own-
ership within the three years after first regis-
tration, the new owner is entitled to the map
software updates.

Updating at an authorized Mercedes-


Benz Center X To switch to navigation mode: slide 5
the controller.
If an update for your map software is availa-
X To select Navi: turn and press the control-
ble, you will receive it free of charge at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center during ler.
your vehicle's annual service. You can The navigation menu appears or the map
arrange a separate appointment for this at displays the current vehicle position.
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center on X If the map appears, slide 5 the control-
request. ler.
The update can only be performed: X Press the controller.
The navigation menu appears.
Rat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
X To return to the map: turn the controller
Rfor navigation data for North America
until Navigation appears and then press
The map software is not provided on DVD. the controller.

Z
106 Navigation functions

Calling up the online map display X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 105).
X Turn the controller until Compass is brought
to the front.
X Press the controller.
The compass display provides the following
information:
RThe current direction of travel with bear-
ing (360 degree format) and compass
direction
RLongitude and latitude coordinates in
Navigation

degrees, minutes and seconds


Requirement for online map display (USA): RHeight (rounded off) above sea level
mbrace must be activated for Internet access RNumber of GPS satellites from which
(Y page 148). a signal can be received
Requirement for online map display (Canada): i Alternatively you can call up this function
a mobile phone must be connected via Blue- using the touchpad (Y page 25).
tooth® (Y page 114) or USB (Y page 200) X To exit the compass display: press the
with COMAND. % button.
X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 105).
X Turn the controller until Online Map Dis‐
play is brought to the front. Drive information
X Press the controller.
The online connection is established. Once
the connection is established, the Google
Maps™ map shows the vicinity of the cur-
rent vehicle position.
i Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (Y page 25).
X To exit the online map display: press the
% button.

X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 105).


Calling up the compass display X Turn the controller until Drive Informa‐
tion is brought to the front.
X Press the controller.
The Starting Drive Information.
Please Wait... message appears.
You will then see maps with the current
vehicle position and the vicinity of the des-
tination in different scales, these are auto-
matically displayed one after another.
If mbrace is activated for Internet access
(Y page 148), additional information can
Navigation functions 107

be displayed, e.g. weather at the destina-


tion.
i Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (Y page 25).
X To exit Drive Information: press the con-
troller.
X Press the % button.

Route flight

Navigation
X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 105).
X Turn the controller until Route Flight is
brought to the front.
X Press the controller.
The route will then be flown along from a
helicopter view.
i Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (Y page 25).
X To exit the route flight: press the control-
ler.
X Press the % button.

Info on navigation

X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 105).


X Turn the controller until Info on Naviga‐
tion is brought to the front.
X Press the controller.
The Digital Operator's Manual is opened at
the section on navigation.
i Alternatively you can call up this function
using the touchpad (Y page 25).

Z
108 Problems with the navigation system

Problems with the navigation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


COMAND does not Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more
resume route guidance than two hours.
after the journey has "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
been interrupted. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on
and driving on.
X Continue route guidance manually (Y page 87).
Navigation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


COMAND is unable to COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the
determine the vehicle's vehicle has been transported.
position. Example:
RAfter transporting the vehicle by ferry
RAfter transporting the vehicle by motorail
X Start the vehicle and pull away.
COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the
driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of
the vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with
navigation announcements and route guidance displays.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


The Navigation COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is
Unavailable Please stored.
refer to the Oper‐ To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND
ator's Manual. mes- deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation
sage appears. system will then be temporarily unavailable.
X Let the vehicle and COMAND heat up or cool down to a normal
temperature.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
Problems with the navigation system 109

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


A message informs you The data medium containing the digital map cannot be used for the
that the data medium update.
containing the digital X To confirm the message: press the controller.
map is incompatible
X Remove the data medium.
with the vehicle soft-
ware. X Have the system database checked at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.

Navigation
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The map software The data medium is dirty.
update has failed. X Clean the data medium.
X Restart the update.

The data medium is scratched.


X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle


interior.
X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.

X Restart the update.

COMAND's integrated hard disk is defective.


X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions


COMAND asks for an The digital map is secured with an activation code.
activation code during X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the map update.

Z
110
111

Your COMAND equipment ................ 112


Important safety notes ..................... 112
General notes .................................... 112
Telephone menu ................................ 113
Connecting/disconnecting a
mobile phone ..................................... 114
Reception and transmission vol-
ume .................................................... 118
Using the telephone ......................... 119
Mobile phone voice recognition ...... 123
Phone book ........................................ 123

Telephone
Address book .................................... 127
Call lists ............................................. 134
Speed dial lists .................................. 136
Messages (text messages and e-
mails) ................................................. 137
112 General notes

Your COMAND equipment General notes


Telephony
i These operating instructions describe all
the standard and optional equipment of A Bluetooth® interface is available for teleph-
your COMAND system, as available at the ony.
time of going to print. Country-specific dif- If your mobile phone supports the Bluetooth®
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that profile PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the
your vehicle may not feature all functions
contacts are automatically displayed in
described here. This also applies to safety-
COMAND.
relevant systems and functions.
You can use the message function if your
i Read the information on qualified special- mobile phone supports the MAP Bluetooth®
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's profile (Message Access Profile).
Manual.
Telephone

With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the


hands-free system and receive vCards via the
Important safety notes Bluetooth® interface.
You can obtain more information about suit-
able mobile phones on the Internet at
G WARNING
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com.
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
traffic conditions. You could also lose control tance center at
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for
the USA or at 1-800-387-0100 for Canada.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.

If you make a call on your mobile phone while HD Voice®


driving, always use hands-free mode. Only COMAND supports telephone calls in HD
use the mobile phone when road, weather Voice®. The voice quality can be improved
and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdic- with this procedure.
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
Requirements for HD Voice®:
phone while driving a vehicle.
RYour mobile phone and mobile phone net-
Bear in mind that at a speed of 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers work provider support HD Voice®.
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) RThe mobile phone and mobile phone net-
per second. work provider of the person you are calling
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation support HD Voice®.
may cause damage to your health and the Depending on the quality of the connection,
health of others. the voice quality may fluctuate.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by electromag-
netic fields. You can reduce this risk by using
an exterior antenna.
Therefore, connect your mobile communica-
tions equipment to the vehicle's exterior
antenna wherever possible.
Telephone menu 113

Call disconnection while the vehicle is Telephone menu


in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
Rthere is insufficient network coverage in
certain areas.
Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver
area (cell) into another and no channels are
free.
Ryou use a SIM card that is not compatible
with the network available.
: Mobile phone network provider

Telephone
Operating options ; Signal strength of the mobile phone net-
work
You can operate the telephone by: = Receiver icon ¢ or ¡
Rusing the controller by turning, pressing, ? Telephone menu character bar
sliding 1 or 4 A Bluetooth® device name of the currently
Rusing the touchpad (Y page 25) connected mobile phone
Rusing the 6 or ~ button on the mul- B To enter characters using the touchpad
tifunction steering wheel C To display the phone book
Rusing the Voice Control System (see the
Symbols : to = and A are not shown until
separate operating instructions)
after a mobile phone has been connected to
Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and COMAND. The symbols depend on your
illustrations in this section refer to COMAND. mobile phone and your mobile phone network
provider. Further information on connecting a
mobile phone (Y page 114).
Function restrictions
Symbol ; shows the current signal strength
You may have to wait before using telephony of the mobile phone network. If all bars are
via COMAND in the following situations: filled, you have optimum reception.
Rwhen the mobile phone is switched off If the bars are not filled, you have very poor
reception or no reception at all.
Rif Bluetooth® is switched off on the mobile
phone i Receiver icon shows whether a call is
Rif the mobile phone has not logged on to a active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.
mobile phone network Calls up the telephone menu
Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off in X To show the main function bar: slide 5
COMAND the controller.
The telephone automatically tries to log on to X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
a network. If no network is available, you may troller.
not be able to make a "911" emergency call. The telephone menu is displayed.
If you attempt to make an outgoing call, the
Showing the menu bar
No Service message will appear for a short
while. X Slide 6 the controller.
If the mobile phone connected supports the
MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access
Z
114 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone

Profile), the 1 menu item is available. Fur- If the mobile phone supports the PBAP
ther information on text messages and e-mail (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP
(Y page 137). (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® pro-
If you have an unread text message or e-mail, files, the following information will be trans-
the 0 mail symbol is displayed at the top mitted after you connect:
in the status bar. The symbol disappears once RPhone book
you have read the text message or e-mail. The
RCall lists
ú symbol is displayed as soon as the mes-
RMessages
sage memory on the mobile phone or SIM
card is full. The symbol disappears once you Further information on allowing or suppress-
delete at least one message. ing the automatic download of the phone
book (Y page 132).
The battery of the mobile phone should
Telephone

Connecting/disconnecting a mobile always be kept sufficiently charged in order to


phone prevent malfunctions.
Prerequisites i Not all mobile phones available on the
market are equally suitable. You can obtain
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, more detailed information about suitable
you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile mobile phones and about the connection
phone. The mobile phone must support between the mobile phone and COMAND
Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. on the Internet at
On COMAND www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com.
X Activate Bluetooth® (Y page 44). You can also obtain more information by
calling.
On the mobile phone
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
PIN when prompted to do so (see the man- ter on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
ufacturer's operating instructions). (1-800-367-6372).
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, In Canada, you can get in touch with the
Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see Customer Relations Center on
the manufacturer's operating instructions). 1-800-387-0100.
This visibility is for restricted periods of i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
time on some mobile phones (see the man- depend on the supported version of the
ufacturer's operating instructions). Hands-Free Profile.
X Set the Bluetooth® device name for the
mobile phone if necessary.
Procedure and general information
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one
manufacturer's products might be identical. Searching for and authorizing (connect-
To make it possible to clearly identify your ing) a mobile phone
mobile phone, change the device name (see Before using your mobile phone with
the manufacturer's operating instructions). COMAND for the first time, you will need to
The name can be freely selected. search for the phone (Y page 115) and then
authorize it (Y page 116). Depending on the
mobile phone, authorization either takes
place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 115

entering a passkey. COMAND automatically X To show the main function bar: slide 5
enables the procedure suited to your mobile the controller.
phone. You can recognize Secure Simple Pair- X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
ing by a code which is displayed in COMAND troller.
and on the mobile phone. You can recognize The telephone menu is displayed.
the passkey system by the fact that you have X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
to enter a code on the mobile phone and in menu: slide 6 the controller.
COMAND. The mobile phone is always con-
X To select Connect Device: turn and press
nected automatically after authorization.
the controller.
If COMAND does not detect your mobile The device list is displayed.
phone, this may be due to particular security
X To select Search for Phones: turn and
settings on your mobile phone. You can also
start the search procedure and authorization press the controller.
A message is displayed that Bluetooth®

Telephone
on the mobile phone (Y page 116).
must be activated on the mobile phone and
Device-specific information on authorizing
must be made visible to other devices.
and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
X To select Start Search: press the con-
phones can be found on the Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ troller.
connect. The available mobile phones are displayed
in the device list.
You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones.
Only one mobile phone can be connected to The duration of the search depends on the
COMAND at any one time. number of Bluetooth® telephones within
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile range and their characteristics.
phone If a new phone is found, it appears in the
The connection is terminated automatically if device list with the Ï symbol. You can now
you leave the receiver range of COMAND or authorize (connect) the mobile phone found
(Y page 116).
deactivate Bluetooth® on your mobile phone.
If the maximum number of authorized devices
If you no longer want the Bluetooth® connec-
in the device list is reached, you will be
tion to be established automatically, the
requested to de-authorize a mobile phone
mobile phone must be de-authorized (discon-
(Y page 118).
nected) (Y page 118).
When you call up the device list again, de-
authorized devices will be removed from the
Searching for a mobile phone list. To update the device list, start the search
again.
Symbols in the device list

Sym- Explanation
bol
Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
# Mobile phone is authorized and
connected.

Z
116 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone

Authorizing a mobile phone (connect- The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit num-


ing) ber combination which you can choose
yourself.
Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing X COMAND: enter the passkey using the
If COMAND has found your mobile phone, you character bar.
can authorize (connect) it. X Select ¬ once all the numbers have
X To select a mobile phone from the device been entered.
list: turn the controller and press to con- X Mobile phone: enter the same passkey
firm. and confirm your entry. Depending on the
A code is displayed in COMAND and on the mobile phone used, you may have to con-
mobile phone. firm the connection to COMAND and for the
The code is the same PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
Telephone

X COMAND: select Yes. minutes to be displayed. You may also save


X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depend- the confirmation on the mobile phone (see
ing on the mobile phone used, you may the manufacturer's operating instructions).
have to confirm the connection to The mobile phone is now authorized and
COMAND and for the PBAP and MAP Blue- connected to COMAND. You can now
tooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may speak using the hands-free system.
take up to two minutes to be displayed. You To ensure an optimum language quality, you
may also save the confirmation on the can set the mobile phone's transmission and
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's reception volume (Y page 118).
operating instructions).
If the Authorization Failed message
The mobile phone is now authorized and
appears, you may have entered a different
connected to COMAND. You can now
passkey or exceeded the prescribed time
speak using the hands-free system.
limit. Repeat the procedure.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you
can set the mobile phone's transmission and i Some mobile phones require a passkey
reception volume (Y page 118). with four or more digits.
The code is different i If you wish to re-authorize the mobile
phone after de-authorizing it, you can
X COMAND: select No.
choose another passkey for it.
The process is canceled. Repeat the
authorization.
Establishing the connection from the
Authorization via passkey entry (access mobile phone
code)
The Bluetooth® device name of COMAND is
If COMAND has found your mobile phone, you "MB Bluetooth".
can authorize (connect) it. X COMAND: call up the telephone menu.
X To select the Bluetooth® name of the X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
desired mobile phone in the device list: turn controller.
and press the controller.
X To select Connect Device: turn and press
The input menu for the passkey is dis-
the controller.
played.
The device list is displayed.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 117

X To select Connect via Phone: turn and choose yourself. Enter the same passkey on
press the controller. both COMAND and the mobile phone and
A message is displayed, stating that you confirm. Depending on the mobile phone
can start the search on your mobile phone. used, you may have to confirm the connection
X Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue- to COMAND and for the PBAP and MAP Blue-
tooth® device (see manufacturer's operat- tooth® profiles.
ing instructions).
COMAND is displayed with the name "MB
Bluetooth" in the mobile phone's device Reconnecting automatically
list. COMAND always searches for the last con-
X Select "MB Bluetooth". nected mobile phone.
A prompt appears in the COMAND display If no connection can be made to the most
asking if the mobile phone should be recently connected mobile phone, the system

Telephone
authorized. searches for the mobile phone that was con-
X COMAND: select Yes. nected before that one.
If No is selected, the procedure is canceled.
If your mobile phone supports Secure Sim-
ple Pairing, a code is now displayed on both Switching between mobile phones
devices. If you have authorized more than one mobile
The code is the same phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
X COMAND: select Yes.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depend-
the controller.
ing on the mobile phone used, you may
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
have to confirm the connection to
COMAND and for the PBAP and MAP Blue- troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
tooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may
take up to two minutes to be displayed. You X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-

may also save the confirmation on the troller.


mobile phone (see the manufacturer's X To select Connect Device: turn and press
operating instructions). the controller.
The mobile phone is now authorized and The device list is displayed.
connected to COMAND. You can now X To select the desired mobile phone: turn
speak using the hands-free system. and press the controller.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you The selected mobile phone is searched for
can set the mobile phone's transmission and and connected if it is within Bluetooth®
reception volume (Y page 118). range and if Bluetooth® is activated.
The code is different Only one mobile phone can be connected at
X COMAND: select No. any one time. The currently connected mobile
The process is canceled. Repeat the pro- phone is indicated by the # dot in the device
cedure. list.

If your mobile phone does not support Secure i You can only switch to another authorized
Simple Pairing, an input menu is displayed for mobile phone if you are not currently mak-
the passkey. The passkey is a one- to sixteen- ing a call.
digit number combination which you can

Z
118 Reception and transmission volume

De-authorizing (disconnecting) a X To select Details: turn and press the con-


mobile phone troller.
The following information concerning the
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de- selected mobile phone is shown:
authorization in COMAND and on the mobile
RBluetooth® device name
phone. Subsequent authorization may other-
wise fail. RBluetooth® address

X To show the main function bar: slide 5 RAvailability status (shown after a new
the controller. search)
X To select Phone: turn and press the con- RAuthorization status

troller. X To close the detailed display: slide 8


The telephone menu is displayed. the controller.
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
Telephone

troller.
X To select Connect Device: turn and press Reception and transmission volume
the controller.
X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
Once the mobile phone has been authorized,
device list: turn the controller. you can optimize the transmission and recep-
tion volume settings. To find out about the
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
best possible settings for your mobile phone,
X To select Deauthorize: turn and press the visit www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com.
controller.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
A prompt appears, asking whether you
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
really wish to de-authorize this device.
(1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Rela-
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
tions at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).
The mobile phone is de-authorized.
i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone,
you should also delete the device name MB
Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Blue-
tooth® list.

Displaying connection details


X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
troller. the controller.
The telephone menu is displayed. X To select Phone: turn and press the con-

X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone


troller.
menu: slide 6 the controller. The telephone menu is displayed.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
X To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller. controller.
X To select Connect Device: turn and press
X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller. the controller.
The device list appears.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
Using the telephone 119

X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the Making a call


device list: turn the controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
Using the telephone menu
X To select Reception Volume or Trans‐ X To show the main function bar: slide 5
mission Volume: turn and press the con- the controller.
troller. X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
X To select a volume setting: turn the con- troller.
troller. The telephone menu is displayed.
X To accept changes: press the controller. X To select all numbers one after the other in
the telephone menu: turn and press the
i Incorrect settings may have an impact on controller each time.
the quality of calls. X To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.

Telephone
The call is made.
Using the telephone
Further information about ending a call
Accepting a call (Y page 123).
X To select Accept: press the controller.
or Using the touchpad
X Press 6 on the multifunction steering X To display the main function bar: slide 5
wheel. the controller.
The call is accepted. X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
Additional functions available during a call troller.
(Y page 120). The telephone menu is displayed.
Adjusting the call volume (Y page 118). X To select n: turn and press the control-

Further information about ending a call ler.


(Y page 123). X Draw all the numbers on the touch-sensi-
tive surface one after another.
i You can also accept the call by using a
X To select w in the telephone menu: turn
voice command in the Voice Control Sys-
and press the controller.
tem (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
The call is made.
i If the phone number of the caller is trans- Further information about the touchpad
ferred, it appears in the display. If the (Y page 27).
phone number is saved in the phone book,
the contact's name is also displayed. If the
Using favorites
phone number is not transferred, Unknown
is shown in the display. This function can be used when a telephone
number has been added as a favorite. Further
information about adding favorites
Rejecting a call (Y page 35).
X To select Reject: turn the controller and X Press the favorites button on the controller.
press to confirm. The favorites are displayed.
or X To select a telephone number: turn the con-

X Press ~ on the multifunction steering troller.


wheel. X To make a call: press the controller.

Z
120 Using the telephone

Redial Further information about ending a call


(Y page 123).
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
Using speed dial
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
troller. X To show the main function bar: slide 5
The telephone menu is displayed. the controller.
X To select w in the telephone menu: turn X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
and press the controller. troller.
The list of outgoing calls is displayed. The The telephone menu is displayed.
most recently dialed number is at the top. X To highlight a number from the character
X To select an entry and make a call: turn and bar: turn the controller.
press the controller. X Press the controller for longer than two
Telephone

Further information about ending a call seconds.


(Y page 123). The telephone menu displays the selected
entry. The number is dialed.
Using call lists Further information on setting up speed dial
(Y page 136).
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller. Further information about ending a call
(Y page 123).
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
The telephone menu is displayed. Functions available during a call
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller. Overview
X To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X To select Calls Received or Calls
Dialed: turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
Further information about ending a call
(Y page 123).
: To add a call (Y page 121)
Using the phone book ; Person you are calling
X To show the main function bar: slide 5 = Symbol for active telephone connection
the controller. ? To end a call
X To select Phone: turn and press the con- A To switch the microphone on/off
troller. (Y page 121)
The telephone menu is displayed. B To send DTMF tones (not possible with all
X To select Name in the telephone menu: turn mobile phones) (Y page 121)
and press the controller.
X Search for a contact (Y page 124).
X To make a call: press the controller.
Using the telephone 121

Available functions: Switching on the microphone:


RAccepting a waiting call (Y page 122) X Select Microphone On.
RMaking a second call (Y page 121) The Q symbol disappears. The The
RCall waiting (Y page 121) microphone is on. message is shown.
Availability depends on the network (only pos-
sible in the GSM network) and on the Blue- Sending DTMF tones
tooth® mobile phone. This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Adding a call Answering machines or other devices can be
If the mobile phone network provider and the controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote
mobile phone support the function, you can query functions.
make another call during an existing call. The X If you would like to listen to the messages

Telephone
previously active call is held. on your answering machine, for example,
dial the corresponding number.
Transmitting individual characters:
X Once a connection has been established to
the answer phone, select the desired char-
acters in the telephone menu: turn and
press the controller each time.
Every character selected will be transmit-
ted immediately.
i You can also send DTMF tones using the
: To add a call
Voice Control system (see the vehicle
X To select °2: turn and press the controller. Operator's Manual).
X Make a call:
RUsing the telephone menu (Y page 119)
Calls with several participants
RRedial (Y page 120)
RUsing call lists (Y page 134) Switching between calls (call waiting)
RUsing the phone book (Y page 119)
RUsing speed dial (Y page 119)

Switching the microphone on/off


This function is available in the telephone
menu during an active phone call.
Switching off the microphone:
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller.
If you make another call, you can switch
X To select Microphone Off: turn and press
between the two calls (call waiting). This func-
the controller. tion depends on your mobile phone network
If the microphone is switched off, the Q provider and the mobile phone (see the man-
symbol and the The microphone is off. ufacturer's operating instructions).
message are displayed.

Z
122 Using the telephone

The calls are marked 1 and 2. The active call is X Add a call (Y page 121).
highlighted. or
Switching between the calls X Answer an incoming call (Y page 122).
X To select °1 or °2: turn and press the X To select Conference in the telephone
controller. menu: turn and press the controller.
or The new participant is included in the con-
ference call. Conference is displayed in
X Press 6 on the multifunction steering
the telephone menu.
wheel.
The selected call is active. The other call is
on hold.
Incoming call during an existing call
Ending the active call (call waiting)
To select ~ in the telephone menu: turn
Telephone

X The call waiting function depends on your


and press the controller. mobile phone network provider and your
or mobile phone. Depending on the mobile
X Press ~ on the multifunction steering phone used, behavior when answering a call
wheel. may vary (see the manufacturer's operating
The other call is still on hold. instructions).
X To activate the call on hold: select Resume. Call waiting: if you receive a call while
The call on hold is activated. If you select already in a call, a message is shown. You also
Hang Up, the call on hold is also ended. hear a tone. You can decide whether to
i On some mobile phones, the call on hold accept or reject the call.
is activated as soon as the active call is Accepting:
ended. X To select Accept: press the controller.
or
Conference call
XPress 6 on the multifunction steering
You can interconnect active and held calls. wheel.
This permits several parties to hear one The incoming call is active, the previously
another and speak with one another. This active call is on hold. You can switch back
function depends on your mobile phone net- and forth between both calls (call waiting)
work provider and the mobile phone (see the (Y page 121).
manufacturer's operating instructions). This is also the case if you accept the wait-
ing call using the Voice Control System (see
the separate operating instructions).
i Depending on the mobile phone, you may
also be able to accept the incoming call
(call waiting) on your mobile phone. This
function and behavior depends on your
mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
Phone book 123

Rejecting: X Press ñ on the multifunction steering


X To select Reject: turn the controller and wheel.
press to confirm. The mobile phone voice recognition is stop-
ped.
or
X Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Phone book
The behavior after the call is rejected
depends on your mobile phone and mobile Introduction
phone network provider.
The telephone book displays the contacts
Option 1: The originally active call is con- from the address book which have a phone
tinued and the incoming call is rejected. number.
Option 2: The originally active call is ended The mobile phone's telephone book is auto-

Telephone
and the incoming call is accepted. matically displayed in COMAND after connec-
Option 3: Both calls are ended. tion (default setting). You can deactivate
automatic calling up (Y page 132).
In the telephone book, you can:
Ending an active call
RCreate new contacts (Y page 125)
X To select = in the telephone menu: turn RAdd information to contacts (Y page 125)
and press the controller. RSearch for contacts (Y page 124)
or RStore contacts (Y page 126)
X Press ~ on the multifunction steering RDelete contacts (Y page 126)
wheel.
The active call is ended. Further information on importing contacts
(Y page 132).
When you import, save, edit or add contacts,
Mobile phone voice recognition they will be permanently saved in COMAND.
These contacts will remain there even when
You can start or end voice recognition on your you connect COMAND to a different mobile
mobile phone with this function. Further infor- phone. You can view these contacts even
mation on the voice recognition service; see without a mobile phone.
the manufacturer's operating instructions.
To start the mobile phone voice recogni-
Calling up the phone book
tion:
X Connect the mobile phone to COMAND
(Y page 114).
X Press and hold the ó button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can now use the mobile phone voice
recognition.
To end the mobile phone voice recogni-
tion:

Z
124 Phone book

X To show the main function bar: slide 5 Searching for a contact


the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
Using the character bar
troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
X To select Name in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
If the phone book contains contacts, they
will be displayed in alphabetical order. The
character bar at the bottom of the display is
active.
You can now search for a contact
(Y page 124).
Telephone

Further information on the symbols shown You determine the first letter of the contact
(Y page 124). you are looking for with the first character you
enter.
i You can also call up the phone book with
the multifunction steering wheel; see the
X To select characters: turn the controller
separate operating instructions. and press to confirm.
The first contact with the selected first
character is highlighted in the phone book.
Symbol overview If there are similar contacts, the next dif-
ferent character is shown. For example,
Sym- Explanation with contacts such as Jana and John, the
bol beginnings of the names are identical. The
next different characters A and O are
Æ Contact that has been entered, edi- offered for selection.
ted or saved on COMAND. X Select the characters of the contact you are
\ Contact with voice tag searching for one by one, pressing and con-
These contacts have also been firming with the controller each time.
assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are X To select ¬: turn and press the control-
available in vehicles with the Voice ler.
Control System (see the vehicle The contacts in the phone book are dis-
Operator's Manual). played.
X To select a contact: turn and press the con-
à Contact that was called up from a troller.
mobile phone
The G symbol indicates that a contact con-
¯ Contact imported from the SD tains more than one phone number.
memory card or USB device.
X To select a contact with the G symbol:
® Contact imported via the Blue- turn the controller and press to confirm.
tooth® interface. The phone numbers are displayed. The G
symbol changes to I.
Information about character entry
(Y page 32).
Phone book 125

Using the touchpad Adding a new contact


You determine the first letter of the contact
you are looking for with the first character you
enter.
X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first
character is highlighted in the phone book.
Further information on handwriting recog-
nition on the touchpad (Y page 27).
X Draw additional letters on the touchpad
surface one after another.
X To complete the search and return to the
X Slide 5 the controller repeatedly in the

Telephone
phone book: press the touchpad. phone book until the selection list appears.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select and call the contact: glide up or
down and press. X To select New: turn and press the controller.
X To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home: turn the controller and press to con-
Displaying the details of a contact firm.
X To select a telephone category, e.g.
Mobile Phone: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
If you have marked a number as preferred,
it appears at the top of the list and is high-
lighted.
X To select Continue: turn and press the
controller.
The input menu with input lines is dis-
played.
X To highlight a contact in the phone book: X Enter characters using the controller

turn the controller. (Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).


X To select G: slide 9 the controller. X To finish and save an entry: select ¬.

X To select Details: turn and press the con-


The contact is created in the phone book
and in the address book.
troller.
The detailed view appears.
Closing the detailed display: Adding information to a contact
X To select %: slide 8 the controller. You can add a telephone number to an exist-
ing contact.
X To highlight a contact in the phone book:
turn the controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select Add Phone No.: turn and press
the controller.

Z
126 Phone book

X To select a category for the number, e.g. X Search for a contact on the mobile phone
Home: turn the controller and press to con- d (Y page 124).
firm. X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select a telephone category, e.g. X To select Save: turn and press the control-
Mobile Phone: turn the controller and ler.
press to confirm. The contact has now been saved. The con-
If you have marked a number as preferred, tact is identified by the ¥ symbol in the
it appears at the top of the list and is high- phone book.
lighted.
X To select Continue: turn and press the
i Saved contacts are also displayed in the
address book.
controller.
The phone number is stored. Saving or editing the contact data on
COMAND does not change the contacts on
A maximum of five entries can be saved for
Telephone

the mobile phone. If automatic calling up of


one category. phone contacts is activated, COMAND dis-
If five numbers are already stored for the plays the copy ¥ with the changed data.
entry you are searching for, a prompt will To add additional data, such as additional
appear asking whether you wish to overwrite phone numbers or e-mail addresses, select
one of the existing numbers. this contact. In this way, you avoid creating
Overwriting an entry additional copies of the mobile phone
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. entry.
A list of the existing five phone numbers is
displayed.
Deleting a contact
X To select the number to be overwritten
from the list: turn the controller and press You can delete contacts that have been
to confirm. added, supplemented, saved or imported in
The entry field for the new phone number is COMAND.
displayed. If there are only phone numbers saved under
X Enter characters using the controller the contact, the contact is deleted from the
(Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27). phone book and the address book.
Canceling the overwriting of an entry If there are additional entries under the con-
tact, such as a navigable destination, only the
X To select No: turn and press the controller. phone numbers are deleted. The contact is
The process is canceled. retained in the address book with the remain-
ing entries.
X To highlight a contact in the phone book:
Saving a contact
turn the controller.
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
book by different symbols (Y page 124). X To select Delete Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether the con-
tact should be deleted.
Address book 127

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. R2000 entries are reserved for perma-
The phone number is deleted. nently saved contacts.
or R3000 entries are reserved for contacts
X To select No: turn and press the controller. that you can load from the mobile phone.
The process is canceled. i Before selling your vehicle, delete the
contacts saved in COMAND using the reset
function (Y page 47).
Closing the phone book
X To select & from the character bar: turn
the controller and press to confirm. Calling up the address book
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.

Telephone
Address book X To select Phone: turn and press the con-

Introduction troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions. X To select Phone: slide 5 and press the
Familiarize yourself with the address book controller.
functions before beginning your journey. X To select Address Book: turn and press
You can use COMAND when the road and the controller.
traffic conditions permit. You could otherwise
become involved in an accident in which you
or others could be injured.
The address book displays all the contacts
from the various sources (mobile phone,
memory card, USB device, COMAND phone
book, navigation).
You can use the contacts to make telephone
calls, navigate and to write messages.
If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND
and automatic calling up is activated An address book entry can also include a pic-
(Y page 132), the mobile phone's contacts ture. This is shown to the left of the address
are displayed in the address book. If you dis- data. Address book entries with pictures can
connect the mobile phone from COMAND, only be created by importing vCards (vcf
these contacts are no longer displayed in the files). Further information on importing
address book. vCards (Y page 132). The quality of the pic-
When you import, save, edit or add contacts, ture depends on the picture's resolution.
they will be saved in COMAND. These con- X To browse in the address book: turn the
tacts will remain there even when you con- controller.
nect COMAND to a different mobile phone.
You can view these contacts even without a
mobile phone.
i The address book can store a total of
5000 contacts.

Z
128 Address book

Searching for a contact X Draw additional letters on the touchpad


surface one after another.
Using the character bar X To complete the search and return to the
X Call up the address book (Y page 127). phone book: press the touchpad.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the X To select and call the contact: glide up or
controller. down and press.
X To select Search: turn and press the con-
troller.
X To select characters: turn the controller
Adding a new contact
and press to confirm. You can enter address data directly into the
The first contact with the selected first address book. If you store telephone num-
character is highlighted in the phone book. bers in the COMAND phone book, these are
If there are similar contacts, the next dif-
Telephone

also saved in the address book. If you store a


ferent character is shown. For example, navigation destination, COMAND creates an
with contacts such as Jana and John, the address book entry which includes the com-
beginnings of the names are identical. The plete navigable address data.
next different characters A and O are X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
offered for selection.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
X Select the characters of the contact you are controller.
searching for one by one, pressing and con- X To select New: turn and press the controller.
firming with the controller each time. The surname and first name input lines are
X To complete the search: slide 5 the con- displayed.
troller repeatedly until the character bar X Enter characters using the controller
disappears. (Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).
or X To save the surname and first name: select
X To select ¬: turn and press the control- ¬.
ler. The details for the contact are displayed.
The contacts in the address book are dis- X To add a desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail
played. Address): turn and press the controller.
X To select a contact: turn and press the con- Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
troller. sponding input menu appears.
Information about character entry X Enter characters using the controller
(Y page 32). (Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).
X To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
Using the touchpad
X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X To switch to the menu bar: glide down.
X Select Search.
X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first
character is highlighted in the address
book.
Further information on handwriting recog-
nition on the touchpad (Y page 27).
Address book 129

Displaying contact details X Enter characters using the controller


(Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).
X To finish and save an entry: select ¬.

A maximum of five telephone numbers can be


saved for one contact.

Starting route guidance to an address


or geo-coordinates
If an address with a ZIP code is saved, the
address can be used for route guidance. If the
X Call up the address book (Y page 127). ZIP code cannot be assigned to an exact

Telephone
X To select a contact: turn and press the con- address, you can adjust the destination sub-
troller. sequently using the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed. X Call up the address book (Y page 127).

The entries can be categorized as follows: X To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
\ Business details
The details for the contact are displayed.
6 Home details
X To select an address: turn and press the
i An address book entry can contain the controller.
following information: or
Rname X To select an entry with geo-coordinates:

Rfirst name turn and press the controller.


The navigation menu is displayed.
Rcompany
X To select Start: slide 6 and press the
Rup to five telephone numbers
controller.
Rtwo email addresses The route to the destination address is cal-
RInternet address culated and route guidance starts.
Rtwo addresses
Rtwo navigation addresses (transferred
from navigation(Y page 65)) Making a call
Rgeo-coordinates X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
Adding information to a contact
The details for the contact are displayed.
X Call up the address book (Y page 127). X To select a telephone number: turn and
X To select a contact: turn and press the con- press the controller.
troller. The number is dialed. Further information
The details for the contact are displayed. about the functions during a call
X To add a desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail (Y page 120).
Address): turn and press the controller.
Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
sponding input menu appears.

Z
130 Address book

Sending text messages Editing a contact


X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X To highlight the telephone number: turn the
controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select Send Text Message: turn and
press the controller.
The entry fields for a text message are dis-
played (Y page 141).
X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
Telephone

X To select a contact: turn and press the con-


Observe the requirements for the message troller.
function (Y page 138). The details for the contact are displayed.
X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-

Sending an e-mail troller.


X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X To select Edit: turn and press the control-
X Select an entry: turn and press the control- ler.
ler. The entry field for the selected entry is dis-
The details for the contact are displayed. played.
X To select an e-mail address: turn and press
Information about character entry
the controller.
(Y page 32).
The entry fields for an e-mail are displayed
(Y page 142).
Observe the requirements for the message Changing the category of an entry
function (Y page 138).
X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X Select an entry: turn and press the control-
Displaying sub-entry information ler.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
X Select an entry: turn and press the control- troller.
ler.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X To select Change Category: turn and
X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller. press the controller.
X To select a category: turn the controller and
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
press to confirm.
X To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The display is shown in full.
Address book 131

Storing the phone number as a speed Deleting a voice tag


dial number X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X Call up the address book (Y page 127). X Search for an address book entry with a
X Select an entry: turn and press the control- voice tag (Y page 128).
ler. X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed. X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the
X To highlight the desired telephone number: controller.
turn the controller. X To select Delete: turn and press the con-
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. troller.
X To select Speed Dial: turn and press the X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
controller. The voice tag is deleted.
X To select Assign Speed Dial Preset: or

Telephone
turn and press the controller. X To select No: turn and press the controller.
X To select a memory position for the speed The process is canceled.
dial: turn and press the controller.
The phone number has been saved as a Listening to a voice tag
speed dial.
X Search for an address book entry with a
voice tag (Y page 128).
Voice tags X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the
Introduction
controller.
You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control X To select Listen: turn and press the con-
System (see the separate operating instruc- troller.
tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to You hear the voice tag.
an address book entry, you can call up this
entry with a voice command and dial a phone
number, for example. You can add one voice Changing the display and sorting cri-
tag per address book entry. teria for contacts
Adding a voice tag X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
X Call up the address book (Y page 127). troller.
X Search for an address book entry with or X To select Options: turn and press the con-
without a voice tag ¦ (Y page 128). troller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select Display and Sorting: turn and
X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the press the controller.
controller. You have the following options:
X To select Add: turn and press the controller.
RLast Name, First Name (default setting)
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
The Voice Control System guides you The contacts are sorted by surname and
through the dialogs. displayed with a comma.
RLast Name First Name

Z
132 Address book

The contacts are sorted by surname and i If the saved address book entry contains a
displayed without a comma. phone number, the entry is also displayed
RFirst Name Last Name in the phone book.
The contacts are sorted by first name and Saving or editing the contact data on
displayed without a comma. COMAND does not change the contacts on
X To select the required option: turn and the mobile phone. If automatic download-
press the controller. ing of phone contacts is activated,
The contacts are sorted and displayed COMAND displays the copy ¥ with the
according to the selection. changed data. To add additional data, such
as additional phone numbers or e-mail
addresses, select this contact. In this way,
you avoid creating additional copies of the
Automatically importing contacts
mobile phone entry.
from the phone
Telephone

Depending on the mobile phone used, you


can set whether the contacts should be called Deleting a contact
up automatically after the mobile phone is
X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
connected to COMAND.
X Search for a contact (Y page 128).
X Connect a mobile phone (Y page 114).
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X Call up the address book (Y page 127).
X To select Delete Entry: turn and press
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
the controller.
troller.
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
The contact is deleted.
troller.
or
X To select Automatically Import Con‐
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
tacts from Phone: turn and press the
controller. The process is canceled.
You can allow O or suppress ª the auto-
matic download.
Importing contacts
Information and requirements
Saving a contact
Contacts can be imported as vCards (vcf
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone files). A vCard is an electronic business card.
book by different symbols (Y page 124). A memory card, USB device or a Bluetooth®
X Call up the address book (Y page 127). connection can be used for importing.
X To select a contact: turn and press the con-
i Up to 2000 entries can be imported into
troller. the address book. A message notifies you
The details for the contact are displayed. when the maximum number is reached. In
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. order to be able to then import new con-
X To select Save: turn and press the control- tacts, you have to delete existing contacts
ler. (Y page 132).
The contact has now been saved.
Address book 133

Source Prerequisites X To select Download Contacts: turn and


press the controller.
Memory card The SD memory card is X To select From Memory Card or From USB
inserted. It contains device: turn and press the controller.
importable contact details.
USB device The USB device is inserted Receiving vCards via Bluetooth®
into the USB port. It con-
COMAND
tains importable contact
details. X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the
Bluetooth® If the sending of vCards is controller.
connection supported via Bluetooth®, X To select Options: turn and press the con-
vCards can be received on troller.

Telephone
mobile phones or net-
X To select Download Contacts: turn and
books, for example.
press the controller.
Bluetooth® must be activa-
X To select From Bluetooth Device: turn
ted in COMAND and on the
and press the controller.
respective device (see the
If COMAND is connected to a mobile
manufacturer's operating
phone, the connection is terminated.
instructions).
vCards can now be received by a device
(PC, mobile phone) via Bluetooth®.
i If automatic calling up of the contacts is
deactivated (Y page 132), the Import External device
from Phone option is available. X Start the data transfer (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
Importing from the memory card or USB The number of vCards received is displayed
device in COMAND.
Contacts imported from the memory card or COMAND
from a USB device are identified by the ¯
X To cancel the transfer: press the controller.
symbol.
If a mobile phone was connected, the con-
The following conditions must be fulfilled in nection to the mobile phone is established
order to import vCards: again.
RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
Received vCards are identified by the ®
directory or in folders. COMAND allows you symbol in the address book.
to select the relevant folders directly.
RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf". i If you switch to another main function,
e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the
i COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1 reception of vCards will be terminated.
and 3.0.
X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the
controller.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.

Z
134 Call lists

Deleting imported contacts i If you connect a different mobile phone to


COMAND, the call lists from the new mobile
X To change to the menu bar when in the phone are displayed.
address book or the telephone menu: slide
6 the controller.
X To select Options: turn and press the con- Opening the call list and selecting an
troller. entry
X To select Delete Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
X Select one of the following options:
RInternal Contacts
RImported from Storage Device
RImported from Bluetooth Devices
Telephone

RDownloaded from Phone


Turn and press the controller.
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The contacts are deleted. List of selected phone numbers (example)
or : Date and time (if available)
X To select No: turn and press the controller. ; Telephone number of the highlighted
The process is canceled. entry and symbols (if assigned)
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
Call lists
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
Introduction troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue-
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
tooth® profile, the call lists from the mobile
phone are displayed in COMAND. When con- controller.
necting the mobile phone, you may have to X To select Call Lists: turn and press the

confirm the connection for the PBAP Blue- controller.


tooth® profile. X To select Calls Received or Calls

If your mobile phone does not support the Dialed: turn and press the controller.
PBAP Bluetooth® profile, COMAND generates The relevant list is displayed.
its own call lists. These are not the same as X To select an entry and make a call: turn and
the call lists in your mobile phone. press the controller.
The Call list option is not available unless a Closing the call list
mobile phone is connected to COMAND. X To select & to the left of the list: slide
If the contact for an incoming call is not saved 8 the controller.
in the address book, you can use the call list
or
to save the telephone number. You can save
this telephone number as a new contact in the X Press the % button.
address book or add it to an existing contact The list is closed.
(Y page 135). i You can also call up the list of dialed num-
bers by pressing the 6 button when the
telephone menu is shown. In this case, the
Call lists 135

list will only show names or phone num- X To show the main function bar: slide 5
bers. the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
Displaying details from a list entry The telephone menu is displayed.
Abbreviated list entries can also be shown in X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
full. controller.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5 X To select Call Lists: turn and press the
the controller. controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con- X To select Calls Received or Calls
troller. Dialed: turn and press the controller.
The telephone menu is displayed. The relevant list is displayed.

Telephone
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the X To highlight the desired telephone number:
controller. turn the controller.
X To select Call Lists: turn and press the X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
controller. X To select Save: turn and press the control-
X To select Calls Received or Calls ler.
Dialed: turn and press the controller. X Select New Entry.
The relevant list is displayed. X Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
troller. Phone.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. The selected category is marked with #.
X To select Details: turn and press the con- If you have marked a number as Prefer‐
troller. red, it is shown at the top of the list and is
The details are displayed. highlighted.
X To go back to the list: slide 8 the con- X Select Continue.
troller repeatedly until the list is highligh- The entry field for the name of the new con-
ted. tact is displayed. The entry field for the
telephone number is filled in automatically.
X Enter characters using the controller
Saving telephone numbers (Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).
X To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
Adding new entries to the address book
The new contact has been created.

Adding information to an address book


entry
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller.

Z
136 Speed dial lists

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the Deleting call lists
controller.
Call lists which are generated and managed
X To select Calls Received or Calls
by COMAND can be deleted on COMAND.
Dialed: turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed. You cannot delete call lists from COMAND
which are displayed on a mobile phone that
X To highlight the desired telephone number:
supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.
turn the controller.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
the controller.
X To select Save: turn and press the control-
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
ler.
troller.
X Select Add Phone No..
The telephone menu is displayed.
X Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Telephone

X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile controller.


Phone. X To select Call Lists: turn and press the
X Select Continue. controller.
The address book is displayed. X Select Delete Call Lists.
X Search for the desired contact A prompt appears asking whether you wish
(Y page 128). to delete all call lists.
X Press the controller when you have finished X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
searching. The call lists are deleted.
The telephone number has been saved.
or
A maximum of five telephone numbers can X To select No: turn and press the controller.
be saved for one contact.
The process is canceled.
If five numbers are already stored for the
entry you are searching for, a prompt will i If you delete these call lists from the
appear asking whether you wish to overwrite mobile phone (see the separate mobile
one of the existing numbers. phone operating instructions), COMAND
updates the call list display the next time it
Overwriting an entry
connects.
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
A list of the existing five numbers is dis-
played. Speed dial lists
X To select the number to be overwritten
Setting up
from the list: turn the controller and press
to confirm. X To show the main function bar: slide 5
The entry is overwritten with the new tele- the controller.
phone number. X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
Canceling the overwriting of an entry troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
X To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
The process is canceled.
troller.
X To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
Messages (text messages and e-mails) 137

X Select Speed Dial Preset List. Deleting all speed dial presets
The speed dial list is displayed.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
X To highlight a memory position for the
the controller.
speed dial: turn the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
If you highlight an entry that already exists troller.
in the speed dial list, this is overwritten with The telephone menu is displayed.
the new entry.
X To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
troller.
X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset.
X To select Call Lists: turn and press the
The phone book is displayed. controller.
X Search for a contact (Y page 124).
X Select Speed Dial Preset List.
X To select a contact: turn and press the con- The speed dial list is displayed.

Telephone
troller. X To highlight the desired memory position:
The phone number has been saved as a turn the controller.
speed dial.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select Delete All Speed Dial Pre‐

Deleting sets: turn and press the controller.


X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
Deleting a speed dial preset All speed dials are deleted.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5 or
the controller. X To select No: turn and press the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con- The process is canceled.
troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
X To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con- Messages (text messages and e-
troller. mails)
X To select Call Lists: turn and press the General notes
controller.
New messages are identified by an audible
X Select Speed Dial Preset List.
signal and the / symbol in the COMAND
The speed dial list is displayed.
display. Once you have read all the messages,
X To highlight the memory position you want
the symbol is no longer displayed.
to delete: turn the controller.
COMAND displays the 100 newest text mes-
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
sages and e-mails.
X To select Delete Speed Dial Preset: The ú symbol is displayed when the
turn and press the controller. mobile phone's message memory is full. The
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. symbol is no longer displayed if you delete
The speed dial preset has been deleted. messages on the mobile phone.
or
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled. Function restrictions
Text messages cannot be written while the
vehicle is in motion.

Z
138 Messages (text messages and e-mails)

Prerequisites Settings
To use the message functions, the connected Calling up the settings menu for mes-
mobile phone must support the MAP Blue- sages
tooth® profile. The prompt for the MAP Blue-
tooth® profile may have to be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
With some mobile phones, some settings still
have to be made after connecting to
COMAND (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions). The messages are displayed the
next time you connect to COMAND.
An e-mail account must be set up on the
Telephone

mobile phone for the e-mail function (see the


manufacturer’s operating instructions).
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
To read and write e-mails in COMAND, the e- the controller.
mail account first needs to be configured
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
(Y page 139).
troller.
Some mobile phones with the MAP Blue- The telephone menu is displayed.
tooth® profile:
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Ronly show new text messages. controller.
Rdo not support the deleting or editing of X To select 1: turn and press the controller.
text messages. The message menu is displayed.
Rdo not support the drafts folder for text X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
messages. controller.
Rdo not support the sending of text mes- X To select Settings: turn and press the
sages. controller.
Rdo not support the e-mail function. The text message settings and the available
Rdo not send messages in a locked status. e-mail accounts of the connected mobile
Not all mobile phones available on the market phone will be displayed.
are equally suitable. You can obtain further
information about settings and supported Configuring the text messages dis-
functions of Bluetooth®-capable mobile played
phones on the Internet at X Call up the settings menu for messages
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com. (Y page 138).
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- X To highlight Text Message: turn the con-
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes troller.
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
A menu with the following options is shown:
RAll Messages
All the messages are displayed.
RNew Messages
Only the messages that are new on the
mobile phone are displayed. You can also
Messages (text messages and e-mails) 139

display the last 100 text messages using Deactivating the e-mail function
the Download option in the message
X Call up the settings menu for messages
menu.
(Y page 138).
ROff
X To select E-Mail Off: turn and press the
The messages are not displayed auto- controller.
matically. You can display the 100 new- E-mail reception is deactivated.
est text messages from the mobile phone
using the Download option in the mes-
sage menu.
Changing the displayed name of the e-
mail account
X To select the required option: turn and
press the controller. Some mobile phones:
Rdo not support the changing of the dis-
Configuring the e-mails displayed played name

Telephone
Rsupport only the email address of the email
X Call up the settings menu for messages
(Y page 138). account
X To highlight an e-mail account: turn the X Call up the settings menu for messages
controller. (Y page 138).
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. X To highlight an e-mail account: turn the

A menu with the following options is shown: controller.


RAll Messages X To select G: slide 9 the controller.

All the messages are displayed. X To select Own E-Mail Address: turn and

RNew Messages
press the controller.
The input menu for entering your own e-
Only the messages that are new on the mail address is displayed.
mobile phone are displayed. You can also
display the last 100 text messages using
the Download option in the message
Downloading messages manually
menu.
ROff X To show the main function bar: slide 5
The messages are not displayed auto- the controller.
matically. You can display the last 100 X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
text messages using the Download troller.
option in the message menu. The telephone menu is displayed.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Configuring an e-mail account controller.
X To select 1: turn and press the controller.
X Call up the settings menu for messages
The message menu is displayed.
(Y page 138).
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
X To select an e-mail account: turn and press
controller.
the controller.
X To select Download: turn and press the
The e-mail account is now configured. E-
mails can now be received and sent in controller.
COMAND.

Z
140 Messages (text messages and e-mails)

Downloading text messages and e-mails X To select 1: turn and press the controller.
from the phone The message menu is displayed with the
X Select From the Phone. unread messages.
The messages are downloaded. If you have X To select the message: turn and press the
selected Automatic Download in the e- controller.
mail settings, manual downloading is not The message text is displayed.
possible. If you want to read messages that have
Updating from the e-mail server by the already been read again, you have to call up
mobile phone the corresponding message folder
(Y page 140).
X Select From the E-Mail Server.
The e-mails in the mobile phone are upda- In the message folder
ted.
Telephone

This function is not supported by all mobile


phones.

Reading messages
In the message menu

X To show the main function bar: slide 5


the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller.
The message menu contains all the unread X To select 1: turn and press the controller.
text messages and e-mails. If the correspond-
The message menu is displayed.
ing folder is called up, the messages are dis-
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
played sorted by text messages and e-mails.
controller.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
X To select Folder: turn and press the con-
the controller.
troller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
X To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn
troller.
and press the controller.
The telephone menu is displayed.
The selected folder is displayed.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller.
Messages (text messages and e-mails) 141

X To select the message: turn and press the X To show the main function bar: slide 5
controller. the controller.
The message is displayed. X To select Phone: turn and press the con-
X To scroll through the message or select troller.
phone numbers in the text: turn the con- The telephone menu is displayed.
troller. X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
The display scrolls up or down line by line, controller.
or skips to the next or previous telephone X To select 1: turn and press the controller.
number and automatically highlights it. The message menu is displayed.
The following sub-folders can be selected X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
for text messages and e-mails: controller.
RInbox X To select Folder: turn and press the con-

Telephone
This folder contains all the incoming mes- troller.
sages. X To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn
ROutbox and press the controller.
This folder contains all the outgoing mes- The selected folder is displayed.
sages. X To highlight the desired message: turn the

RDrafts controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
This folder contains all the messages that
you have saved as a draft. X To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
i Folders cannot be selected if they are The detailed view appears.
empty.
X To close the detailed display: slide 8
Depending on the mobile phone used, the the controller.
sub-folder function may be available.

Read-aloud function for messages Writing text messages


X To start the read-aloud function: press the
Writing a new text message
controller when the message is displayed.
X To select Read Aloud: turn and press the
controller.
COMAND reads out the message.
X To cancel the read-aloud function: press
the controller, select Cancel Read-
Aloud Function and press the controller
again.
You can set the language (Y page 45) and the
speed (Y page 41) of the read-aloud function.
Observe the requirements for the message
Displaying details and phone numbers function (Y page 138).
COMAND can also show a shortened sender
display in full.

Z
142 Messages (text messages and e-mails)

X To show the main function bar: slide 5 X Display the message (Y page 140).
the controller. X Press the controller.
X To select Phone: turn and press the con- X To select Reply: turn and press the con-
troller. troller.
The telephone menu is displayed. The text message input menu is displayed.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the The addressee's details are automatically
controller. filled in using the details in the original
X To select 1: turn and press the controller. message.
The message menu is displayed.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller. Writing e-mails
X To select New: turn and press the controller. Writing a new e-mail
Telephone

X To select Text Message: turn and press


the controller.
The text message input menu is displayed.
The To: input line is selected.
Entering a recipient
X Enter characters using the controller
(Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).
or
X To enter a phone number from the phone
book: select Æ.
The contacts from the address book which Observe the requirements for the message
have a phone number are displayed. function (Y page 138).
X Search for and select an entry X To show the main function bar: slide 5
(Y page 124). the controller.
The number is copied to the recipient line. X To select Phone: turn and press the con-

Entering text and sending text messages troller.


The telephone menu is displayed.
X To select an input line for text: select 5 in X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
the character bar. controller.
X Enter characters.
X To select 1: turn and press the controller.
COMAND contains templates which you The message menu is displayed.
can use when writing your messages X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
(Y page 143). controller.
X To send the text message: select OK.
X To select New: turn and press the controller.
X To select E-Mail: turn and press the con-
Answering a text message troller.
Observe the requirements for the message The e-mail input menu appears. The To:
function (Y page 138). input line is selected.
Messages (text messages and e-mails) 143

Entering a recipient Forwarding an e-mail


X Enter characters using the controller Observe the requirements for the message
(Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27). function (Y page 138).
or X Display the message (Y page 140).
X To insert an e-mail address from the X To call up a menu: press the controller.
address book: select Æ. X To select Forward: turn and press the con-
The contacts from the address book which troller.
have an e-mail address are displayed. The input menu appears. The subject line is
X Search for and select an entry automatically filled in with the same details
(Y page 124). as those in the original message.
The e-mail address is copied to the addres-
see line.

Telephone
Entering the subject Text templates
X To select the Subject: input line: select Using text templates
5 in the character bar.
X Enter characters.

Entering text and sending e-mails


X To select an input line for text: select 5 in
the character bar.
X Enter characters.
COMAND contains templates which you
can use when writing your messages
(Y page 143).
X To send the e-mail: select OK.
: Displays text templates
X Select the input line for a text message
Answering an e-mail
(Y page 141) or e-mail (Y page 142).
Observe the requirements for the message X To select text templates : in the character
function (Y page 138). bar: turn and press the controller.
X Display the message (Y page 140). The text templates are displayed.
X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select and insert a text template: turn

X To select Reply: turn and press the con- and press the controller.
troller. The text template is inserted into the text
The e-mail input menu appears. The message or e-mail.
addressee's details are automatically filled
in using the details in the original message.
When replying to an e-mail, you can also
select Reply to All instead of Reply. In this
case, the reply is sent not just to the sender
but to all those who received the original mes-
sage.

Z
144 Messages (text messages and e-mails)

Editing text templates X To select a usable phone number while the


message is displayed: turn and press the
controller.
X To select Call Number: turn and press the
controller.
The call is made.
i It is possible that a highlighted numerical
sequence may not contain a telephone
number.
i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no."
: Displays text templates functions to save this telephone number or
to add it to an existing entry.
Telephone

X Select the input line for a text message


(Y page 141) or e-mail (Y page 142).
X To select text templates : in the character
Storing a sender as a new entry in the
bar: turn and press the controller. address book
The text templates are displayed.
X To highlight the text template to be edited: Storing the sender of a text message
turn the controller. X To call up the menu when a text message is
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. displayed: press the controller.
X To select Edit: turn and press the control- X To select Save Number: turn and press the
ler. controller.
The text template is displayed in an input X To select New Entry: turn and press the
line. controller.
X Edit the text template as desired. Further
X Select a number category, e.g. Home.
information on character entry using the
X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
controller (Y page 32) and on handwriting
recognition on the touchpad (Y page 27). Phone.
X Select Continue.
X To adopt changes to the text template,
select ¬: turn and press the controller. The input line for the name of the new con-
The text template has been changed. tact is displayed. The input line for the tele-
phone number is filled in automatically.
X Enter characters using the controller

Calling a text message sender (Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27).
X To finish the entry: select OK.
X Display the message (Y page 140). The new contact has been created.
X To call up a menu: press the controller.
X To select Call Sender: turn and press the Saving the sender of an e-mail
controller.
The call is made. X To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis-
played: press the controller.
X To select Save Sender's E-Mail
Using a phone number in the text Address: turn and press the controller.
Numbers in text messages that are highligh-
ted can be used.
Messages (text messages and e-mails) 145

X To select New Entry: turn and press the X Search for the desired entry (Y page 128).
controller. X Press the controller when you have finished
The input line for the name of the new con- searching.
tact is displayed. The input line for the e- The e-mail address has been added.
mail address is filled in automatically.
X Enter characters using the controller
(Y page 32) or the touchpad (Y page 27). Deleting messages
X To finish the entry: select OK.
X Call up the message folder (Y page 140).
The new contact has been created.
X To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
Adding the sender to an address book
entry X To select Delete: turn and press the con-

Telephone
troller.
Storing the sender of a text message X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
X To call up the menu when a text message is The message is deleted.
displayed: press the controller. or
X To select Save Number: turn and press the X To select No: turn and press the controller.
controller. The process is canceled.
X To select Add Phone No.: turn and press
the controller.
i This delete function is not supported by all
mobile phones. The Delete failed. mes-
X To select a category for the number, e.g.
sage then appears.
Home: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
X To select a telephone category, e.g.
Mobile Phone: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
X To select Continue: turn and press the
controller.
The address book is displayed.
X Search for the desired entry (Y page 128).
X Press the controller when you have finished
searching.
The telephone number has been added.
A maximum of five entries can be saved for
one category.

Saving the sender of an e-mail


X To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis-
played: press the controller.
X To select Save Sender's E-Mail
Address: turn and press the controller.
X To select Add: turn and press the controller.
The address book is displayed.

Z
146
147

Your COMAND equipment ................ 148


Important safety notes ..................... 148
General notes .................................... 148
Conditions for access ....................... 148
Setting up an Internet connection
(Canada) ............................................. 149
Establishing/ending the connec-
tion ..................................................... 153
Google™ local search ....................... 154
Destination/route download ........... 156
Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ........... 159
Web browser ..................................... 160

Online and Internet functions


148 Conditions for access

Your COMAND equipment Function restrictions (Canada)


You will not be able to use the Mercedes-Benz
i These operating instructions describe all Apps and Internet connection, or will no lon-
the standard and optional equipment of ger be able to use them, or may have to wait
your COMAND system, as available at the before using them, in the following situations:
time of going to print. Country-specific dif-
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that Rwhen the mobile phone is switched off
your vehicle may not feature all functions Rif your mobile phone has not been enabled
described here. This also applies to safety- for Internet access
relevant systems and functions. Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off on

i Read the information on qualified special- COMAND and the desired phone is sup-
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's posed to be connected via Bluetooth®
Manual. Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off on
the mobile phone and the phone is sup-
posed to be connected via Bluetooth®
Online and Internet functions

Important safety notes Rif the mobile phone is not connected via
USB and the phone is supposed to be con-
G WARNING nected via USB
If you operate information systems and com- Rif neither the mobile phone network nor the
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a
cle while driving, you will be distracted from phone and an Internet connection
traffic conditions. You could also lose control Rif the mobile phone has not been enabled
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
for Internet access via Bluetooth® and/or
Only operate the equipment when the traffic USB
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
The driver is not permitted to call up websites
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
Apps is restricted.
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
i It is possible that you are not able to
You must observe the legal requirements for receive calls when an Internet connection
the country in which you are driving when is active. This depends on the mobile phone
operating the system. and the mobile phone network used.

General notes Conditions for access


Connection difficulties while the vehi-
USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Inter-
cle is in motion
net access, mbrace must be activated and
The connection may be lost if: operational. Furthermore, mbrace must be
Rthe mobile phone network coverage is activated for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Inter-
insufficient net access. Take note of the connection pri-
Rthe vehicle has moved into a mobile phone
orities. An emergency call has the highest pri-
ority. When a service call, e.g. a breakdown
cell with no free channels
service call or the MB Info Call, is active, an
Rthe SIM card used is not compatible with
emergency call can still be initiated. A service
the network available call, on the other hand, has priority over a
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada) 149

current Internet connection. Therefore, you Setting up an Internet connection


cannot establish an Internet connection dur- (Canada)
ing a service call.
Canada: a mobile phone must be connected Procedure and general information
via Bluetooth® (Y page 114) or USB If you are using Internet access for the first
(Y page 200) with COMAND. Furthermore, time, you must enable the connected mobile
you need a valid mobile service contract with phone for Internet access (Y page 149). If the
a data option, which is used to calculate the connected mobile phone supports the Blue-
associated connection costs. tooth® PAN profile or the USB classes RNDIS,
Conditions for a Bluetooth® connection CDC/NCM or CDC/ECM, you do not need to
make additional settings. The Internet con-
RThe mobile phone supports at least one of nection is established. If the connected
the Bluetooth® profiles DUN (Dial-Up mobile phone does not support the named
Networking) or PAN (Personal Area Bluetooth® profile or the named USB classes,
Network). predefined (Y page 150) or manual access
The Bluetooth® profiles DUN and PAN ena- data (Y page 150) must be set.

Online and Internet functions


ble the Internet connection of the mobile While initializing the mobile phone for the
phone to be made available to the system. Internet connection, access data which is
Conditions for a USB connection already on the mobile phone may be over-
RThe mobile phone supports at least one of written. You should therefore check the set-
the USB classes: tings on the mobile phone (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
- RNDIS (Remote Network Driver Inter-
face Specification)
- CDC/NCM (Network Control Model) Enabling the mobile phone for Inter-
- CDC/ECM (Ethernet Control Model) net access
- CDC/ACM (Access Control Model) X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
The USB classes enable the mobile phone X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Internet connection to be made available to controller.
the system. X To select Settings: turn and press the
The terms of use are shown when the system controller.
is used for the first time and then once a year X To select Configure Internet Set‐
thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of tings: turn and press the controller.
use when the vehicle is stationary. A message is displayed telling you that the
The driver is not permitted to call up websites settings for the Internet functions depend
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz on your mobile phone network provider and
Apps is restricted. your mobile phone.
i The availability of individual Mercedes- If a mobile phone has already been ena-
Benz Apps may vary depending on the bled, the device list is displayed.
country. X To select Start Search: turn and press
the controller.
Mobile phones are displayed that:

Z
150 Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)

Rare connected with COMAND X To select Predefined Settings: turn and


Rfulfill the conditions for the Internet func- press the controller.
tions A list of countries appears.
Rhave not yet been set up for the Internet If the mobile phone network provider pro-
function vides multiple access data options, the rele-
vant access data still has to be selected. This
depends on the data package used, for exam-
ple.
To check whether the predetermined dial-in
data corresponds with the dial-in data provi-
ded by your mobile phone network provider,
proceed as follows (Y page 152) and select
Manual Settings. The access data is dis-
played.
The access data for the mobile phone net-
Online and Internet functions

work provider is selected once for the mobile


X To select a mobile phone from the device
phone connected and is loaded again each
list: turn the controller and press to con-
time the mobile phone is connected. Estab-
firm.
lishing a connection (Y page 153).
If the mobile phone supports the Blue-
You must set the access data of the mobile
tooth® PAN profile or the USB classes
phone network provider who provides the
RNDIS, CDC/NCM or CDC/ECM, Internet
SIM card and the associated data package
access is set up. You can use the Internet
(access settings) for the connected mobile
functions.
phone. The access data remains the same
If the connected mobile phone does not when you are in a different country (roaming).
support the named Bluetooth® profile or The access data of another network is not
the named USB classes, predefined selected.
(Y page 150) or manual access data
(Y page 150) must be set. Manually setting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider
Setting access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Selecting the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada) 151

X To select Manual Settings: turn and Explanation of the access data


press the controller.
An overview of the provider settings Input field Meaning
appears. Phone Num‐ Access number for estab-
X Set access data (Y page 151). ber: lishing the connection
X To confirm settings: select Confirm Set‐ The access number
tings and turn and press the controller. depends on the mobile
The access data for the mobile phone net- phone used. For GSM/
work provider is selected once for the mobile UMTS mobile phones,
phone connected and is loaded again each *99***1# is used as a
time the mobile phone is connected. Estab- standard.
lishing a connection (Y page 153). Access APN network access point
You must set the access data of the mobile Point: (Access Point Name)
phone network provider who provides the You can obtain this infor-
SIM card and the associated data package mation from your mobile

Online and Internet functions


(access settings) for the connected mobile phone network provider.
phone. The access data remains the same
when you are in a different country (roaming). Entry is not necessary for
The access data of another network is not all mobile phone network
providers and mobile
selected.
phones.
Setting access data PDP Type: Internet protocol used.
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
User ID: The user identification
can be obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.
Set the access data in accordance with your
data package. You can contact your mobile Password: The password can be
phone network provider to obtain the precise obtained from your
access data. mobile phone network
provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.

Z
152 Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)

Input field Meaning When the Internet connection is active, you


cannot edit or delete the access data of the
Auto DNS: Automatic allocation of currently set mobile phone network provider.
DNS servers is activated. X Call up the device list (Y page 152).
If the function is deactiva- X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
ted, the DNS server
device list: turn the controller.
addresses must be
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
entered manually.
X To select Change Configuration: turn
DNS (Domain Name
Service) and press the controller.
X Select Predefined Settings or Manual
DNS1: Fields for entering the Settings.
DNS2: DNS server addresses The provider settings are displayed.
manually. The address In order to edit the access data of the mobile
can be obtained from your phone network provider you have two
mobile phone network options:
Online and Internet functions

provider.
ROption 1: select the predefined access data
of the mobile phone network provider
Managing existing access data (Y page 150).
ROption 2: manually set the access data of
Calling up the device list the mobile phone network provider
(Y page 150).

Canceling Internet access permissions


for a mobile phone
X Call up the device list (Y page 152).
X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select Delete Configuration: turn
and press the controller.
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153). A prompt appears asking whether you wish
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the to delete the Internet configuration.
controller. X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
X To select Settings: turn and press the The Internet access permission for the
controller. mobile phone is now canceled. The mobile
X To select Configure Internet Set‐ phone can now no longer be used by the
tings: turn and press the controller. system for Internet functions.
The device list is displayed. or
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
Editing the access data The process is canceled.
The mobile phone must be connected with
the system for the access data to be changed.
Establishing/ending the connection 153

Changing the device name of the mobile shared WiFi usage" option must be activa-
phone ted on COMAND for this (Y page 42)
X Call up the device list (Y page 152). Ending the connection
X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the X Press Cancel in the connections window.
device list: turn the controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X Select Change Internet Device Name. Calling up Internet functions
A character entry appears. X To show the main function bar: slide 5
X Enter name and confirm with ¬. the controller.
The device name is changed. X To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
Setting automatic disconnection of
the Internet connection

Online and Internet functions


If a preset time has elapsed during which the Connection status
Internet functions have not been used, the
Internet automatically disconnects.
X Call up the device list (Y page 152).
X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X To select Disconnect Automatically
When Inactive: turn and press the con-
troller.
X To select 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes or 20
: Display of existing connection and signal
Minutes: turn and press the controller. strength of the mobile phone network
In most cases, the current connection status
is then shown in the status bar when you
Establishing/ending the connection
switch to another main function.
Establishing the connection
Read the conditions for establishing a con- Detailed connection status
nection (Y page 148).
A connection can be established by: X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Rentering a web address (Y page 160)
controller.
Rcalling up the Mercedes-Benz mobile web-
X To select Settings: turn and press the
site (Y page 159)
controller.
Rcalling up a Mercedes-Benz App
X To select Connection Status: turn and
(Y page 159)
press the controller.
Rcalling up a favorite
The following information is displayed:
Restablishing an Internet connection via a
wireless networking device. The "Allow

Z
154 Google™ local search

Rthe volume of transferred data Further information on how to enter the


Rconnection status search position and search term
Rthe device name of the mobile phone (Y page 154).
i You will first need to register COMAND
before you can use the Internet functions.
Ending the connection To do so, you have to enter your name and
postal address once in the vehicle and con-
USA: you cannot cancel the connection your-
firm the general terms and conditions.
self. The Internet connection is automatically
terminated if the system does not recognize
any user input within a five-minute time Entering a search position and search
period. term
Canada:
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
Online and Internet functions

controller.
X To select ©: turn and press the control-
ler.
If the mobile phone Internet connection is
canceled, COMAND tries to reconnect. You
should therefore always close the connection
on COMAND.
It is only possible for the driver to enter a
search term when the vehicle is stationary.
Google™ local search The following options are available for
Local Search:
Calling up Local Search
RAt the current location
Searches for destinations near the current
vehicle position
RIn the Vicinity of the Destination
You can search for destinations in the vicin-
ity of the destination if route guidance is
active.
RAt another location
Searches for destinations near the location
i You can also select a destination from the
You do not need a Google™ account to use
general search history.
Local Search.
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
press the controller.
X To select Google Local Search: turn and
press the controller.
Google™ local search 155

X To select the required option: turn and Calling up Google Street View™
press the controller. X Select Google Street View.
X To select Enter search term: turn and Google Street View™ is called up.
press the controller. i If no Google Street View™ information is
The input menu for the search term is dis- available, a corresponding message
played. appears.
X To complete the entry and start the search,
Calling up Panoramio by Google™
select a: turn and press the controller.
The search results are displayed. X Select Panoramio by Google.
i Google™ determines how the search Panoramio by Google™ is called up. You
results are sorted; this is not necessarily see pictures of places worth seeing in the
based on the shortest distance. vicinity of the search result.
Further information on how to make use of a
search result (Y page 155).
Popular searches

Online and Internet functions


Using search results
X To select a search result: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
Displaying details
X Select Details.
The address of the selected entry is dis-
played.
Using a search result as a destination You can use this function if search queries
have already been carried out.
X Select Set as Destination.
If the vehicle is stationary, the search results
The navigation is called up. You can use the
can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel
search result as the destination for route
Adler".
calculation.
X Call up Local Search (Y page 154).
i At the same time the search result is
stored in the "Last destinations" memory. X To select the search position, e.g. At cur‐

You can take the destination from this rent location: turn and press the con-
memory and save it permanently in the troller.
contacts. X To select Popular searches: turn and

Calling up a destination press the controller.


The most frequent search queries are dis-
XSelect Call. played.
The telephone menu is called up and a call
is activated.
i If there is no phone number available, the Search history
menu item cannot be selected.
You can use this function if search queries
have already been carried out.

Z
156 Destination/route download

If the vehicle is stationary, the search results Resetting last location searches
can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel
X Call up Local Search settings (Y page 156).
Adler".
X To select Reset last location
X Call up Local Search (Y page 154).
searches: turn the controller and press to
X To select the search position, e.g. At cur‐ confirm.
rent location: turn and press the con- A prompt appears asking whether the last
troller. location searches should be deleted.
X To select Search history: turn and press X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
the controller. The search queries are deleted.
The most recent search queries are dis- or
played.
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Local Search settings
Deleting search queries
Calling up settings
Online and Internet functions

X Call up Local Search settings (Y page 156).


X To select Delete all searches: turn the
controller and press to confirm.
A prompt appears, asking whether the last
search queries should be deleted.
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The last search queries are deleted.
or
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and Destination/route download
press the controller.
X To select Google Local Search: turn and Prerequisites
press the controller. To download navigation locations you need a
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. Google™ account and your vehicle identifica-
The current settings are displayed. tion number. Further information about the
vehicle identification number (VIN)
Setting the search radius (Y page 159).
To download navigation locations, the
X Call up Local Search settings (Y page 156).
mbrace system must be:
X To select Search radius: turn and press
Ractivated
the controller.
A menu appears. Roperational

X To select the desired entry: turn and press Ractivated for the services of the system and
the controller. for Internet access
The selected setting is accepted. For information on the mbrace system, see
Exiting a menu the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.
X Select &.
Destination/route download 157

Procedure and general information Displaying destinations in the vehicle


Sign into your Google™ account on the Inter-
net. Use the Google Maps™ website to send
the destination to a server (Y page 157).
Using the Download POI App, the destination
is displayed in the vehicle (Y page 157).
The destination can be:
Rimported (Y page 158)
Rused for route guidance (Y page 158)
Rcalled up (Y page 158)
Rdeleted from the server (Y page 158) X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
press the controller.
Sending destinations to the server
X To select Download POI: turn and press

Online and Internet functions


X Sign into your Google™ account. the controller.
X Call up the Google Maps™ website. Available destinations are shown in the list.
X Enter a destination. X To select and download a destination: turn
X Click "More" at the destination. and press the controller.
X Click "Send". X To exit destination download: select Close.
X Enter the corresponding information in the
Further information on how to use the desti-
boxes shown. nation for route guidance (Y page 158).
X Select "Send to car".
Further information on importing the desti-
X Select Mercedes-Benz as the vehicle nation (Y page 158).
brand. Further information on deleting the destina-
X Enter the mbrace e-mail address or the tion (Y page 158).
vehicle identification number. You can save up to 50 destinations for your
Further information about the vehicle iden- vehicle on the server and display these in the
tification number (Y page 159). list. If you send further destinations to the
X Click "Send". server, the oldest entries are deleted from the
The destination is sent to the server. list.
The availability of the destination/route
download function is country-dependent.

Z
158 Destination/route download

Using destinations X Display the destination in the vehicle


(Y page 157).
Displaying details X To highlight a destination: turn the control-
ler.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X Select Call.
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call (Y page 119).

Importing destinations
You can save destinations and routes on an
SD card when importing.
X Display the destination in the vehicle X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 184).
(Y page 157). X Display the destination in the vehicle
Online and Internet functions

X To highlight a destination: turn the control- (Y page 157).


ler. X To highlight a destination: turn the control-
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. ler.
X To select Details: turn and press the con- X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
troller. X Select Import.
The destination address is shown. The entry is saved on the SD card.

Using a destination for route guidance Deleting a destination from the server
X Display the destination in the vehicle Destinations on the server are automatically
(Y page 157). deleted after seven days.
X To highlight a destination: turn the control- X Display the destination in the vehicle
ler. (Y page 157).
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. X To highlight a destination: turn the control-
X To select Set as Destination: turn and ler.
press the controller. X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
You then switch to navigation mode and X Select Delete.
can start route calculation. A prompt appears asking whether the des-
The destination is entered in the list of last tination should be deleted.
destinations. X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The phone number is deleted.
Calling up the destination or
You can use the function if: X To select No: turn and press the controller.

Ra mobile phone is connected The process is canceled.


(Y page 114)
Rthe destination address contains a tele-
phone number
Further Mercedes-Benz Apps 159

Displaying the vehicle identification Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website


number (VIN)
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
press the controller.
X To highlight Download POI: turn the con-
troller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
The vehicle identification number is dis-
played.
Exiting a menu Connecting to the Internet: (Y page 153)
X Press the % button. The online functions contain the Mercedes-
Benz Mobile Website as a predefined favorite.
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).

Online and Internet functions


Deleting destinations automatically X Select the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web‐
after importing to the server
site menu.
Destinations on the server are automatically The Mercedes-Benz home page appears.
deleted after seven days. i You cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz
X Select the Options menu for the Download Mobile Website menu.
POI App (Y page 160).
The menu shows the current settings.
X To select Delete after importing to Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
the server: turn and press the controller. X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
Switch the setting on O or off ª. X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
Exiting a menu press the controller.
The available Mercedes-Benz Apps are
X Press the % button.
displayed.
X To select the desired app: turn and press

Further Mercedes-Benz Apps the controller.


Additional Mercedes-Benz Apps can be pur-
General notes chased on the Mercedes-Benz website. You
To be able to use Mercedes-Benz Apps, you can find further information at:
first have to register. To do so, you have to http://apps.mercedes-benz.com/apps/
enter your name and postal address once in The available features are country-depend-
the vehicle and confirm the general terms and ent.
conditions. A message to this effect appears
the first time you call up the online and Inter-
net functions.
For individual Mercedes-Benz Apps, it may be
necessary to pay license fees before using.
Use is then limited to a certain period of time.
License fees must be paid again for use
beyond this time period.

Z
160 Web browser

Closing Mercedes-Benz Apps Web browser


X Press the % button. Calling up a website
The Internet menu appears.
or Function restrictions
X Press the % button for longer than two Internet pages cannot be shown while the
seconds. vehicle is in motion.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu or the
Internet menu appears. Entering a web address

Adjusting the settings of individual


apps
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
Online and Internet functions

press the controller.


X To highlight the desired app: turn the con-
troller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
The current app settings are displayed. X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
X To select www: turn and press the controller.
An input menu for the web address is dis-
Resetting adjustments played.
X Enter characters using the controller or the
This function resets all Mercedes-Benz Apps
number keypad.
settings to the factory settings.
X To finish entry and call up a website: select
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
¬.
X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
press the controller. Selecting a web address from the list
The available Mercedes-Benz Apps are X When the character bar is displayed, slide
displayed. 5 the controller.
X To select G: slide 9 the controller. X To select the desired web address: turn and
X To select Reset: turn and press the con- press the controller.
troller. The web address can still be changed as
A prompt appears asking whether you desired.
really wish to reset. X To call up a website: select ¬.
X Select Yes or No. The website is called up.
If you select Yes the settings are reset.
If you select No the process is canceled.
Web browser 161

Navigating the website X To show the menu: press the % but-


ton.
Step Result X To call up the Options menu: select 3

X Turn the control- Navigates from one by turning and pressing the controller.
ler. selectable item (e.g. X To close the website: select &.
link, text field or X To call up the previous website: select
menu) to the next t.
and highlights the X To call up the next website: select u.
respective element
X To refresh the website: select Î.
on the website.
The website is refreshed. This procedure
Sliding the control- Moves the pointer may take some time.
ler: on the page. i While the website is loading, a cross
X Left or right appears in the menu. This can be used to
1 cancel the loading procedure.

Online and Internet functions


X Up or down 4 X To enter a URL: select g.
X Diagonally 2 X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 160).
X Favorites: select f.
X Press the control- Opens the selected
X To close the active window: select h.
ler. item.
X Press %. Calls up the menu.
Options menu
Opening in a new window
Menu functions

: Closes the browser In order to be able to use this function, the


cursor must be on a link.
; Goes back/forward
X To show the menu: press the % but-
= Updates/cancels
? URL entry ton.
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
A Favorites
ler.
B Closes the window
X Select Open In A New Window.
C Options
The website is opened in a new window.

Z
162 Web browser

Adding to bookmarks X To show the menu: press the % but-


ton.
Adds the current website to the favorites. The
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
website can then be called up using the menu.
You can store up to 20 favorites in the menu. ler.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
X To show the menu: press the % but-
current setting.
ton.
X Select Jump From Link To Link.
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
If a website has been called up and the
ler. controller is turned, the cursor jumps from
X Select Add to Bookmarks. link to link.
The message: The website was added
to bookmarks appears.
Directional scrolling
Current URL You can use this function to scroll up and
down on the web page.
X To show the menu: press the % but- X To show the menu: press the % but-
Online and Internet functions

ton.
ton.
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
ler.
ler.
X Select Current URL.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
The URL appears. current setting.
X Select Directional Scrolling.
Zoom If a website has been called up and the
You can use this function to enlarge web controller is turned, the cursor moves up or
pages. down depending on the direction of the
turn.
X To show the menu: press the % but-
ton.
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
Settings
ler.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the Overview
current setting.
X Select Zoom.
X To navigate on the web page: slide 1,
4 or 2 the controller.
X To zoom in on the web page: turn the con-
troller.

Jumping from link to link


You can use this function to skip from one link
to the next on a website.
Web browser 163

X To show the menu: press the % but- Changing settings


ton. X To select the desired setting: turn and
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
press the controller.
ler. Switch the setting on O or off ª.
A menu appears.
Changing the character size or character
X Select Settings.
code.
You can activate/deactivate the following
X Select Character Size or Character
settings:
Code.
RDownload Images Automatically X To select the setting you require: turn and
It may take some time to download the press the controller.
contents of websites that contain a large
amount of images. Therefore, it may be i If you change the settings, the websites
useful to deactivate this option. may not be displayed correctly.
RBlock Pop-Ups
Deleting private data

Online and Internet functions


Pop-ups are windows (usually with adver-
tisements) which are displayed automati-
cally when you call up a website. You can
block these displays.
RActivate Javascript
Javascript makes it possible to display and
interact with dynamic content on the web-
site.
RAllow Cookies
Some websites save information in small
text files (cookies) on your system. You can
determine whether cookies may be stored. X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
REnable Internet Audio X To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
You can switch the browser's audio play- X To select Settings: slide 6 , turn and

back on or off here. press the controller.


RHide Scroll Bars
A menu appears.
X To select Delete Private Data: turn and
You can show or hide the scroll bar here.
press the controller.
RShow Link Target
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
You can display the link's URL here. current setting.
RCharacter Size X To select the setting you require: turn and
You can select the font size which is used press the controller.
when displaying the website. or
RCharacter Code X Select Delete All Data On Exit.
You can select a different character set Switch the setting on O or off ª.
here, e.g. if the characters of a website
appear distorted.

Z
164 Web browser

Option Function Selecting favorites


X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
All Deletes all personal
data. X To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
Cache Deletes data in the The Favorites menu appears.
cache. X Select the desired bookmark.

Cookies Deletes cookies that The favorite is opened in a new window.


are created by web-
sites which you have Editing favorites
called up.
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
URL History Deletes all websites X To select the Internet Favorites menu:
visited (path). turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
O Delete All If this function is
X To bring the desired favorites to the front.
Data On Exit activated O, all per-
Online and Internet functions

sonal data is deleted X To select Edit: slide 6 and press the


when you exit the controller.
Internet browser. An input menu appears.
X Enter the web address (URL) and name
i If you reset COMAND to the factory set- using the character bar.
tings (reset function), these data and set-
tings are deleted (Y page 47). Deleting favorites
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153).
Favorites X To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
Introduction The Favorites menu appears.
Favorites/bookmarks are frequently visited X Select the desired favorites.
websites. X Select Delete.
A prompt appears.
Creating favorites X Select Yes or No.
Adding a favorite in the menu If you select Yes the favorite is deleted.
X To call up Internet functions (Y page 153). If you select No the process is canceled.
X Select www.
X Enter the web address (URL) and name
Closing the browser
using the character bar and press ¬.
X Select % in the browser menu
Adding to favorites
(Y page 161)
X To call up the menu: press the % button. or
X To select 3: turn and press the control-
ler.
X Select Add to Bookmarks (Y page 162).
Web browser 165

X Press the % button for longer than two


seconds.
A prompt appears, asking whether you
want to close the Internet browser.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes the application is closed.
If you select No the process is canceled.

Online and Internet functions

Z
166
167

Your COMAND equipment ................ 168


Switching on the radio ..................... 168
Overview ............................................ 168
Setting the waveband ....................... 169
Station ............................................... 169
Tagging music tracks ....................... 171
Displaying the artist and track ........ 171
Calling up sound settings ................ 172
Displaying information ..................... 172
Satellite radio .................................... 172

Radio
168 Overview

Your COMAND equipment Overview

i These operating instructions describe all


the standard and optional equipment of
your COMAND system, as available at the
time of going to print. Country-specific dif-
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that
your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety-
relevant systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's : Main function bar
Radio

Manual. ; Status bar with compass display


= Main display field with available stations
and relevant information
Switching on the radio
? Display of radio station selected
X To display the main function bar: slide 5 A Radio menu bar
the controller. The following functions are available
X To select Radio: turn and press the con- using the radio main function bar:
troller. RHD Radio FM: HD FM radio mode
The radio display appears. You will hear the RHD Radio AM: HD MW radio mode
last station played on the last waveband
RSat Radio: satellite radio
selected.
RRadio Station Presets: 100 preset
positions for radio stations
RInfo on Radio: information on radio in the
Digital Operator's Manual
The following functions are available
using the radio menu bar:
Rè: searches for stations by name
Switching HD Radio on/off RBand: selects wavebands
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller. RPreset: station presets menu

X Select Options. RInfo: displays additional information about

X By selecting O or ª before HD radio, you the current station (radio text)


determine whether HD radio is switched on Rà: sound settings, Burmester® sound
or off. ROptions: radio options
If HD radio is switched off, the system does
not switch to digital radio and it is not possible
to select any sub-channels.
i HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp.
Station 169

Setting the waveband Using the current station list


Using the main function bar
X In radio mode: slide 5 the controller.
The radio main function bar and menu bar
appear. Radio is active.
X Press the controller.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM, Radio Station
Presets and Info on Radio.
X To select the required waveband: turn and
press the controller. i The station list is available in HD FM radio

Radio
mode or HD AM radio mode. It includes all
stations that can be received.
Using the menu bar X In radio mode, press the controller.
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller. The station list appears with the stations
The radio menu bar appears. currently available.
X To select Band: turn and press the control- X To select the desired station: turn and
ler. press the controller.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM and HD Radio AM.
Using direct entry
X To select the required waveband: turn and
press the controller.

Station
Selecting a station
From the main display field

X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.


The radio menu bar appears.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X Select Direct Entry.
An additional menu appears.
HD FM radio mode:
All currently available stations are displayed. X To select the HD FM Frequency option: turn
X In radio mode, turn the controller until the and press the controller.
desired station is in the center. X Enter the frequency of the desired station
in the entry field.
170 Station

HD MW radio mode: Saving/deleting a station


X To select the HD AM Frequency option: turn
and press the controller.
X Enter the frequency of the desired station
in the entry field.
Satellite radio mode:
X To select the SatRadio Channel option:
turn and press the controller.
X Enter the frequency of the desired station
in the entry field.
Station presets: Storing current stations
Radio

X To select the Radio Station Presets X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
option: turn and press the controller. The radio menu bar appears.
X Enter the station preset of the desired sta- X To select Preset: turn and press the con-
tion. troller.
X To select the Save Current Station/
Using the search function Channel option: turn and press the con-
troller.
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X To select the position of the required preset
The radio menu bar appears.
entry: turn and press the controller.
X Select è and enter the first letters of the
or
required station using the controller.
X Select the Edit Station Preset option.
X Press OK to confirm.
COMAND displays a list of available sta- X Select the position of the required preset:

tions. turn the controller.


X To select stations from the list: turn the This can also be a preset position that is
controller and press to confirm. already occupied, which is then overwritten
by the current station.
X Slide 9 the controller.
Using the preset position
An additional menu appears.
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller. X To select the Save Current Station/
X To select Preset: turn and press the con- Channel option: turn and press the con-
troller. troller.
X To select Enter Preset: turn and press The currently set station is stored in the
the controller. selected preset position. A tone signals a
X Enter the station preset of the desired sta- successful preset entry.
tion. or
X In the main display field, press and hold the
controller.
Station list
A list of current allocated preset positions
X In radio mode, press the controller. appears.
The station list appears with the stations X To select the position of the required preset
currently available. and confirm: turn the controller and press.
Displaying the artist and track 171

Moving highlighted stations Activating


X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller. X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears. X To select Preset: turn and press the con-
X To select Preset: turn and press the con- troller.
troller. X To select Station Preset View: On: turn
X Select Edit Station Preset. and press the controller.
X To select the required preset entry: turn the The station preset display appears.
controller. X To switch between the stored stations: turn
X Slide 9 the controller. the controller.
An additional menu appears. Deactivating
X To select the Move Highlighted Sta‐
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.

Radio
tion/Channel option: turn and press the
controller. X To select Preset: turn and press the con-
The list of stored stations appears again. troller.
X To select Station Preset View: Off:
X To move the highlighted station to the new
position: turn the controller and press to turn and press the controller.
confirm. A view of the last waveband you listened to
appears.
Deleting highlighted stations
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears. Tagging music tracks
X To select Preset: turn and press the con-
troller. This function allows you to transfer the music
X Select Edit Station Preset. track currently playing to an Apple® device.
X To select the required preset entry: turn the
You can then purchase it in the iTunes® store.
controller. X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.

X Slide 9 the controller. The radio menu bar appears.


X To select the Delete Highlighted Sta‐ X To select Options: turn and press the con-

tion/Channel option in the additional troller.


menu: turn and press the controller. X Select Tag This Track.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. A message appears in COMAND about stor-
The highlighted station is deleted. ing the track information.
or
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
Displaying the artist and track
The process is canceled.
i Frequencies are already stored in X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
COMAND. There are 100 preset positions The radio menu bar appears.
available. X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X You can determine whether or not the
Activating/deactivating the station artist, track or station name are shown in
presets display the main display area with O or ª before
You can use this function to change to the Show Station Information.
station presets display.
172 Satellite radio

Calling up sound settings Satellite radio

X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller. General notes


The radio menu bar appears. The satellite radio mode requires satellite
X To select à: turn and press the control- radio equipment and registration with a sat-
ler. ellite radio provider.
The sound menu appears (Y page 210). Note that the categories and channels shown
in the illustrations depend on the program
content offered by the provider. The illustra-
Displaying information tions and descriptions in these operating
instructions may therefore differ from the
channels and categories offered by the pro-
Radio

vider.
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily
unavailable or interrupted for a variety of rea-
sons. These include environmental or topo-
graphical conditions as well as other factors
beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC. This means operation may not be possi-
ble in certain areas.
These include:
This function is available in HD FM radio and Rtunnels
HD AM radio mode. Rparking garages
Reception is only possible if the radio stations Rlocations inside or next to buildings
provide the relevant information.
Rlocations in the vicinity of other structures
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio offers more than
X To select Info: turn and press the control-
140 digital-quality radio channels providing
ler. 100% commercial-free music, sports, news
If the station supports this function, addi- and entertainment.
tional information will be shown.
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio employs a fleet of
If available, you will see: high-performance satellites to broadcast
Rstation abbreviation around the clock throughout the USA and
Rthe current track Canada.
Rthe artist of the current track The satellite radio program is available for a
Rinformation about the current program
monthly fee. Details are available from the
SIRIUS XM Service Center and at
Rhotline number for the station or latest
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
headlines
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Back to radio display:
Your new Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with
X To select Info: slide 6 and press the SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio pre-installed at the
controller. factory. This service is free for a six-month
trial period. About a month before the trial
period ends, information will be provided on
how to extend this subscription. An acoustic
signal sounds and a message is shown,
Satellite radio 173

describing how the subscription can be If the satellite receiver is not installed cor-
extended. rectly, the Device Unavailable message
will appear.

Registering satellite radio


Switching to satellite radio
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X To select Radio: turn and press the con-
troller.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband

Radio
selected.
X To select Radio in radio mode: slide 5
and press the controller.
: Phone number of provider The menu with the available radio modes
; SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver appears.
X Switch on satellite radio mode X To select Sat Radio: turn and press the
(Y page 173). controller.
The satellite radio main menu appears The No Service message appears if there is
showing the preview channel. You cannot no signal.
select any other stations.
X To select Options in the radio menu bar:
turn and press the controller. Satellite radio overview
X To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The service information screen appears.
Once the telephone connection has been
established:
X Follow the instructions of the service staff.
The activation process may take up to
ten minutes. If the activation is completed
successfully, the Updating Channels...
message appears in the display, followed : Main function bar
by the satellite radio main menu. ; Preset
i You can also have the satellite service = Channel name and channel number
activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS ? Channel information
XM Radio website at A Station presets menu
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or B Category list
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). C Keyword search
i If registration is not included when pur- D Options menu
chasing the system, your credit card details Channel information ? can be viewed in
will be required to activate your account. detail (Y page 176).
174 Satellite radio

Selecting a category i You can only select currently permitted


digits.
Satellite radio channels are sorted into vari-
ous categories. You can choose between var-
Selecting a channel via the satellite
ious categories such as News/Discussions,
radio station list
Sports and Country (if available). The cate-
gory list is sorted alphabetically. The content
of the categories is sorted by channel num-
bers.
X To call up the category list: select Cat‐
egory in the menu bar by turning and
pressing the controller.
The category list appears.
Radio

X To select a category: turn the controller


and press to confirm.
The category selected is shown in the dis-
play. You hear the station last selected for You can select the channel using the station
this category. list displaying the artists and tracks that are
The # dot indicates the current setting. currently playing.
X To select Options in the radio menu bar:
At the beginning of the category list, the
All Channels category appears. This cat- turn and press the controller.
egory enables you to browse all available X To select Current Station List with
channels. Artist & Title: turn and press the con-
troller.
The channel list appears.
Selecting a channel X Select the desired channel

Channel search
Keyword search
X When the display/section window is selec-
ted, slide 8 or 9 the controller.
COMAND searches in both directions
(ascending and descending) and stops at
the next channel found in the selected cat-
egory.

Entering channel numbers directly


X To select Options in the radio menu bar:
turn and press the controller.
The satellite radio menu appears. X To select the keyword search è in the
X To select Direct Entry: turn and press menu bar: slide 6 and turn the controller.
the controller. X To enter the required search term: turn and
An input menu appears. press the controller.
X To select a channel number: turn and press Direct and indirect results are shown.
the controller. X Select the required result.
X COMAND sets the selected channel. The relevant channel is played.
Satellite radio 175

Memory functions Setting a music alert


Quick save:
X Set the desired channel in satellite radio
mode.
X Press and hold the controller until the pre-
set list appears.
X To select the preset number: turn and press
the controller.
A tone confirms that the storing process
was successful.
Saving a channel using the edit function: X To select Options in the radio menu bar:

Radio
X In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the con- turn and press the controller.
troller. X To select Alert for Artist, Track &

X To select Preset: turn and press the con- Sports Event: turn and press the control-
troller. ler.
A menu appears.
X To select Edit Station Preset: turn and
X Select Add New Alert.
press the controller.
The list of saved channels appears. A window with a prompt appears.
X To select the preset: turn the controller and X Select Artist or Track.

press for about 2 seconds. The alert is set for the current artist or
The newly saved station overwrites the track.
existing preset.
The music alert window appears
i There are 100 presets available.
X To select Change To or Ignore: turn and
press the controller.
Music and sports alerts If you select Change To, the channel is
changed and the favorite artist or track is
General notes played.
This function makes it possible to store a pro- If you select Ignore, the current channel
gram alert for your favorite artists, tracks or will continue playing.
sporting events.
You can store up to 30 music and sports Setting a sports alert
alerts (favorites).
Music alerts can only be saved whilst a track
is being played. You can also specify sports
alerts via the menu option. The system then
continuously searches through all the chan-
nels. If a match is found with a saved mes-
sage, you will be informed. A window appears
with the respective information.
176 Satellite radio

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: Displaying information


turn and press the controller.
X To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event: turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu appears.
X Select Manage Sports Alerts.
A menu appears.
X Select Select New Alerts.
A menu appears.
X Select the desired team from a league, e.g.
college, NBA, NHL, NFL or MLB. To select Info in the radio menu bar: turn
Radio

X
The alert function for the sports team is and press the controller.
added. Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed.
Editing music and sports alerts If available, you will see:
X Select Edit Alert. Rthe channel logo
A list of set sports alerts appears. Rthe channel abbreviation
X Select Manage Music Alerts. Rthe artist of the track that is currently being
A list of set artists and tracks (artist) played
appears. Rthe current track

X To return to the radio display: select


Info by sliding 6 and pressing the con-
Tagging music tracks
troller.
This function allows you to transfer the music
track currently playing to an Apple® device.
You can then purchase it in the iTunes® store. Displaying service information
Not all radio stations support this function.
The provider's customer service center is
X To select Options in the radio menu bar: available by phone at any time to answer any
turn and press the controller. general questions or questions on the ver-
X To select Tag This Track: turn and press sions available.
the controller. X To select Options in the menu bar: slide
A message about saving this music track on 6 and press the controller.
the Apple® device appears. X To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The provider's details appear.
X To return to the main display: press the
% button.

Channel list updates


During reception of a new channel list, the
Updating Channels... message is shown.
Satellite radio 177

The station last selected is switched to mute


until the update has been completed. Satel-
lite radio mode is not available during this
process.
Once the update has been completed, the
satellite radio basic menu appears. If the
channel previously selected is still available,
this channel will be played.

Sound settings
Information on sound settings (Y page 210).

Radio
178
179

Your COMAND equipment ................ 180


Activating media mode .................... 180
Audio/video mode ............................ 181
Media search ..................................... 187
Media Register .................................. 190
Bluetooth® audio mode .................... 194
Operation with the Media Inter-
face .................................................... 200
Video DVD mode ............................... 202
Picture viewer ................................... 207

Media
180 Activating media mode

Your COMAND equipment Using the main function bar

i These operating instructions describe all


the standard and optional equipment of
your COMAND system, as available at the
time of going to print. Country-specific dif-
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that
your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety-
relevant systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's X To display the main function bar: slide 5
Manual. the controller.
X To select Media: turn and press the con-
Media

troller.
Activating media mode
The last media source you have set is dis-
General notes played.
X To select Media in media mode: slide 5
There are several ways to activate media
sources using COMAND. and press the controller.
The menu appears with the available media
The relevant sections of the Operator's Man- sources.
ual describe the simplest way to activate a
X To select the media source: turn the con-
media source. This section describes all
options for activating media sources. If you troller and press to confirm.
wish to play external media sources, the Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
default display must already be turned on. following options will be available:
The following external media sources can be RDisc
used: REject
RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) RMemory Card
RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) RMedia Register
RCD RMedia Interface 1

RDVD RMedia Interface 2

RSD memory cards RBluetooth Audio

Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® If playable music files are found, they will be
played by COMAND. The corresponding
basic menu will be shown.
Audio/video mode 181

Using the device list radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING
Handling discs while driving may distract you
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
X In media mode, slide 6 the controller. Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
The media menu bar is shown. ary.
X To select Devices: turn and press the con-

Media
troller.
The available media sources will be shown. Notes on audio/video mode
The # dot indicates the current setting. Permissible data carriers
X Select the media source.
RCD-R,CD-A and CD-RW
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The correspond- RDVD-R, DVD-V and DVD-RW
ing basic menu will be shown. RSD memory card
RUSB storage device

Switching on automatically Permissible file systems


After inserting a CD/DVD, this media mode is RISO9660/Joliet standard for CDs
automatically switched on by COMAND. RUDF for video DVDs
If playable music files are found, they will be RFAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS for SD
played by COMAND. memory card and USB storage media
If a media function is already switched on in
COMAND, this will be interrupted and the Multisession CDs
basic display of the CD/DVD mode will
appear. If another function, such as naviga- For multisession CDs, the content of the first
tion, is being operated, the basic display will session determines how COMAND will proc-
not change. Only the music from the last ess the CD. COMAND plays only one session
inserted CD/DVD will be played. and gives priority to the audio CD session.

File structure of a data carrier


Audio/video mode
When you create a disc with compressed
Important safety notes music files, the tracks can be organized in
folders. A folder may also contain subfolders.
G WARNING The disc may contain no more than eight
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, will not be recognized by the system.
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser

Z
182 Audio/video mode

i COMAND supports up to 50,000 files Permissible bit and sampling rates


from one data medium. For data media with
COMAND supports MP3 files of the following
more than 64 GB, only files in the following
types:
folders are supported: Music, Pictures,
Video. Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s
to 320 kbit/s
Track and file names Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz

When you create a disc with compressed COMAND supports WMA files of the following
music files, you can assign names to the types:
tracks and folders. Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
directory itself, the root directory will also be COMAND does not support WMA files of the
treated as a folder. following types:
You should observe the following when RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encryp-
Media

assigning track names: ted files


Rtrack names must have at least one char- Rvariable bit rate
acter. RWMA Pro
Rtrack names must have an extension of a R5.1 surround sound
supported audio/video format, e.g. mp3,
aac or m4v. i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least
Rthere must be a dot between the track 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
name and the extension. 44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a notice-
able deterioration in quality. This is espe-
Example of a correct track name:
cially the case if you have activated a sur-
"Track1.mp3".
round sound function.
Permissible formats Selecting an active partition (USB mass
COMAND supports the following audio for- storage devices only)
mats:
You can select this function for USB storage
RMP3 devices when the storage device is parti-
RWMA tioned. Up to 9 partitions (primary or logical,
RCD-A FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported.
RAAC formats: .aac, .mp4, .m4a and .m4b Selecting an active partition
Copy-protected iTunes® music files with X To select Options in the media menu bar:
the .m4p file extension are not supported. turn and press the controller.
COMAND supports the following video for- X Select Select Active Partition.
mats:
RDVD-V Notes on copyright
RMPEG Audio/video files that you create or repro-
RWMV duce yourself for playback are generally sub-
RM4V ject to copyright protection.
RAVI up to 720p. In many countries, reproductions, even for
private use, are not permitted without the
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Audio/video mode 183

Make sure that you know about the applicable another application (e.g. navigation), the
copyright regulations and that you comply display will not change.
with these. i The drive may not be able to play discs
with copy protection.
Notes on CDs/DVDs Removing
! COMAND is designed to play discs that X In the CD basic menu slide the controller
comply with the EN 60908 standard. There- 6.
fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- X To select þ: turn and press the control-
mum thickness of 1.3 mm. ler.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that The drive ejects the disc. If you do not take
contain data on both sides (DVD on one the disc out of the slot, it is drawn in again
side and audio data on the other), they can- automatically after a short while.
not be ejected and can damage the device. or
Only use round discs with a diameter of X To select Media in media mode: slide 5

Media
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of
and press the controller.
8 cm, even with an adapter.
X To select Eject: turn and press the con-
Discs with copy protection are not compati- troller.
ble with the audio CD standard and therefore
may not be able to be played by COMAND.
Playback problems may occur when playing Menu overview
copied discs.
There may be playback problems if you play
CDs that you have copied yourself with a stor-
age capacity of more than 700 MB.
i COMAND is able to play back audio CDs in
multichannel audio format.

Inserting and removing a disc from


the single CD/DVD drive
: Main function bar
Before inserting or removing a CD/DVD,
; Ejects the CD/DVD
ensure that the cup holder is empty.
= Track display on the disc
Before removing a disc, be aware that the
? Track number and number of tracks in the
CD/DVD can become hot.
track list
Inserting
A Artist and album
X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the prin- B Numerical time display
ted side facing upwards. C Graphic time display
The drive closes and the disc is played.
D Cover view (if available)
If the CD/DVD is operated in Media mode,
the corresponding basic menu will be
shown. If the CD/DVD is started using

Z
184 Audio/video mode

Inserting and ejecting an SD memory Connecting USB devices


card
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
Important safety notes under the armrest.
X Connect the USB device to the USB port.
G WARNING If the corresponding media display is visi-
SD memory cards are small parts. They can be ble, the medium is played and the files are
swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This loaded in the background. If there are no
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal supported audio/video files, you will see a
injury. message to this effect.
Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of
children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, i MP3 players must support Media Transfer
seek immediate medical attention. Protocol (MTP).

! If you are no longer using the SD memory


Media

card, you should remove it and take it out of Activating media mode
the vehicle. High temperatures can dam-
Switching on automatically
age the card.
COMAND supports SD memory cards After inserting a CD/DVD, this media mode is
(Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards automatically switched on by COMAND.
(Secure Digital High Capacity), and SDXC If playable music files are found, they will be
memory cards (Secure Digital eXtended played by COMAND.
Capacity. If a media function is already switched on in
COMAND, this will be interrupted and the
Inserting an SD memory card basic display of the CD/DVD mode will
appear. If another function, such as naviga-
X Insert the SD memory card into the SD card tion, is being operated, the basic display will
slot until it engages. The side with the con- not change. Only the music from the last
tacts must face downwards. inserted CD/DVD will be played.
If the memory card has been selected as a Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
media source, the medium is played and default display must already be turned on
the files are loaded in the background. If when using with USB devices or SD memory
there are no supported audio/video files, cards.
you will see a message to this effect.
X Insert the CDs/DVDs (Y page 183)
i If the SD memory card for navigation is or
inserted into the SD card slot, you can still X Insert an SD memory card: (Y page 184)
select the memory card as a media source.
or
The No Playable Files message then
X Connect a USB device: (Y page 184)
appears.
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
Ejecting an SD memory card starts to play it automatically.

X Press the memory card. Further options for switching on


The memory card is ejected.
X Remove the memory card. RUsing the main function bar: (Y page 180)
RUsing the device list: (Y page 181)
Audio/video mode 185

Playback options All tracks on the data medium are played in


random order.

X In media mode, slide 6 the controller.


The media menu bar is shown. Direct track entry
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
X To select Track Number:: turn and press

Media
troller.
the controller.
Playing similar tracks A menu appears.
X To select Play More Like This: turn and X Enter the desired track number.
press the controller. Skip to time
COMAND automatically creates and plays
a track list with similar tracks. If there are X To select Skip to Time: turn and press the
no comparable tracks on the data carrier, controller.
you will see a message to this effect. A menu appears.
X To set the time: turn the controller
X Select the required track.
or
X Set the desired time.

Selecting an active partition


X To select Select Active Partition:
turn and press the controller.
With the Select Active Partition
option, you can select a partition in the USB
data medium.
Showing track information
Play mode X To select Show Track Information: turn
and press the controller.
X To select Playback Mode: turn and press Ticking or removing the tick from the box in
the controller. front of Show Track Information dis-
X Select Normal Track Sequence. plays or hides the information on the track,
The current track list is played in the order artist and album in the main display field.
it appears on the data medium. Saving files to Media Register
X Select Random Track List.
i With the Save Files to Media Regis‐
The current track list is played in random
ter option, you can transfer supported
order.
audio, image or video files to the COMAND
X Select Random Medium.
hard drive.

Z
186 Audio/video mode

X To select the Save Files to Media Reg‐ Pause and playback function
ister option: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears (Y page 190). X To pause playback: in audio/video mode,
slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X To activate Ë in the Media menu bar:
turn and press the controller.
Playback is interrupted here. The display
changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: in audio/video
mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X To activate Ì in the Media menu bar:
turn and press the controller.
Managing Media Register
Playback is continued from the point of
Media

X To select Manage Media Register: press interruption. The symbol changes to Ë.


the controller.
The contents are shown. Using the control-
ler, files and folders can be renamed or Selecting a track
deleted.
Selecting using the current track list
When renaming files and folders a menu
appears. The characters are entered using X To display the current track list: press
the controller (Y page 32). the controller in the basic display.
X To select Delete All Media Files: turn The category list appears.
and press the controller. X Select the current track list.
Files and folders can be completely deleted X To select a track: turn the controller and
from the Media Register. press to confirm.

Selecting by skipping to a track


X To skip forwards or backwards to a track:
turn or briefly slide 9 or 8 the con-
troller in the media basic display.

Search menu

X Select Memory Info: important parame-


ters for your COMAND hard drive are
shown.
Media search 187

X In media mode, slide 6 the controller. ded retrospectively to the internal Grace-
The media menu bar is shown. note® database.
X To select Search: turn and press the con- An Internet connection is required for this
troller. (Y page 153).
The category list is shown. Selecting Internet update of metadata
X Select a category, e.g. Genres.
X In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
Sub-categories appear with the selection of
The media menu bar is shown.
the main category (depends on the
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
COMAND default settings and the music
tracks available). troller.
X Select Updating Metadata Via Inter‐
net in the selection list.
A connection with the Gracenote® data
server is established. The missing data is
loaded, saved and displayed in the main

Media
display field.
If there is no data found or there is no Inter-
net connection, a corresponding error mes-
sage will appear.

X Select a sub-category, for example Rock. Switching the Gracenote® data display
on/off
If the sub-category Rock contains music
tracks, these will be displayed. X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 184).
X To select Gracenote Media Database:
turn and press the controller.
Gracenote® Media Database X To switch the display off: select None.
General notes In the basic display, Track 1, Track 2, etc.
are shown instead of the Gracenote® data,
This function is available in audio CD mode. for example .
There is a version of X To switch on the display: press the control-
Gracenote® music recognition technology, ler.
Emeryville, California, USA on the COMAND
hard disk. You will recognize this by the logo
in the bottom right-hand corner of certain Media search
audio displays.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text General notes
information, COMAND can use the Grace- COMAND plays back files from the following
note® Media Database to identify unknown data mediums:
audio tracks when in CD audio mode.
RDisc (CD/DVD Audio)
RMemory card
Internet update of metadata
RMedia Register
The option Update metadata via Internet
RUSB storage device
allows any missing metadata for an audio CD
RApple® devices (folder, year and photos are
(e.g. cover, track, album, artist) to be uploa-
not available)

Z
188 Media search

The categories are displayed according to the RPodcasts


data available. RAudiobücher (Audiobooks)
i The categories are available as soon as
Starting the media search the entire media content has been read and
analyzed.
X In media mode, slide 6 the controller. If the same device is reconnected with
The media menu bar is shown. unchanged media content, these catego-
X To select Search: turn and press the con- ries are available more quickly.
troller. When connecting Apple® devices, the cat-
The category list appears. egories “Folder”, “Year” and “Photos” are
not available.

Category list
Searching by current track list
Media

X In media mode, slide 6 the controller.


The media menu bar is shown. X To select Current Tracklist in the cat-
X To select Search: turn and press the con- egory list: turn and press the controller.
troller. The selection list appears.
The category list is shown. X Select the required track.

Depending on the connected media sources


and files, the following categories are listed:
RCurrent
Searching by folder
Tracklist
RFolder Playable files can be searched for in the active
RSelect By Cover data medium's directories.
RKeyword X To select Folder in the category list: turn
Search
RPlaylists
and press the controller.
The folder list appears.
RArtists
X Select the required folder.
RAlbums
The track list appears.
RTrack
X Select the required track.
RGenres
RYear
RComposers
RVideos
RPhotos
Media search 189

Selecting by cover X Select a music track.


The track is played. The basic menu for the
active media source is shown.
X To exit the selection list: press the %
button.

Keyword search

X To select Select By Cover in the category


list: turn and press the controller.
A menu with cover views appears.

Media
COMAND searches all media sources.
X To move the desired folder to the front: turn
the controller.
The track list appears.
X To select the desired track: turn and press
X To select Keyword Search in the category
the controller. list: turn and press the controller.
The input field appears.
X To select required characters: turn and
Searching by genre press the controller for each letter
(Y page 32).
Entering just part of the name of a track or
artist is enough. The search result then dis-
plays the entire text.

X To select Genres in the category list: turn


and press the controller.
COMAND searches all media sources. A
selection list with Genres and media sour-
ces appears. X Select ¬.
X Select the desired Genres. The search results are displayed.
A selection list with music tracks from the The numbers behind the results, as shown
selected genre appears. in the example Tracks (5/0), mean: 5

Z
190 Media Register

results that contain the exact keyword Switching on the MEDIA REGISTER
searched for and 0 results that are similar.
X To display the main function bar: slide 5
X Select one of the results.
the controller.
Keywords that have already been searched
X To select Media: turn and press the con-
for are displayed in the "Search history"
without having to enter them completely. troller.
They can be accepted directly and dis- The menu appears with the available media
played in the search result. sources.
X To select Media Register: turn and press
X Select an entry.
Albums and covers (if available) are shown. the controller.
COMAND searches all media sources. Playback begins at the point last listened to.
X Select an album. If there are no files, you will see a message to
The tracks are listed. this effect.
Media

MEDIA REGISTER basic display

X Select a track.
The basic display appears and playback
starts. : Main function bar
; Display for the active data medium
= Media menu bar
Media Register ? Track display on the disc
General notes A Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
You can store music files, photos or video files
B Numerical time display
in the MEDIA REGISTER. The memory has a
capacity of 10.8 GB. C Graphic time display
D Cover view (if available)
i Keep your original music files, photos and
video files in a secure location. A malfunc-
tion in COMAND may result in the loss of Copying files to the MEDIA REGISTER
music files stored in the MEDIA REGISTER.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of General notes
data.
You can copy photos, music files and videos
from the following data mediums:
RDisc (CD/DVD)
RSD memory card
Media Register 191

RUSB storage device If the data medium contains files that can
RMP3 be copied, a selection menu appears.
i Data can only be copied from an MP3
player if this can be configured as a mass
2. Selecting files
storage device.
Video files from DVD-V cannot be copied.
While copying, several functions will not be
available. If this is the case, you will see a
message to this effect.

1. Selecting a data medium


X To display the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.

Media
X To select Media: turn and press the con- X To select All Media Files: turn and press
troller. the controller.
The menu appears with the available media This command copies all files from the
sources. selected data medium. The symbol next to
X To select the media source: turn the con- All Media Files is filled in. All subse-
troller and press to confirm. quent entries have a checkmark O beside
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the them.
controller. X Select a folder.
X To select Options: turn and press the con- A checkmark O next to the folder entry
troller. highlights the selection.
X To select Continue: turn and press the
controller.
The copying menu appears.

3. Starting the copying process

X Select Save Files to Media Register.


The media list appears. A data medium
from which files can be copied is selected
automatically.
i The Save Files to Media Register
function can be reached from any media In the example, files are copied from a USB
application. device to the Media Register.
X Select the displayed data medium. X To select Start: press the controller.

The data medium is loaded. i The selection of a target folder is optional.


If there is no target folder given, the selec-

Z
192 Media Register

ted files are saved to the main directory of X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the Media Register. the controller.
X To select Target Folder: turn and press X To select Media: turn and press the con-
the controller. troller.
X Select a folder. The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X Select Continue.
X To select the media source: turn the con-
X To select Start: press the controller.
troller and press to confirm.
The copying procedure starts and is shown
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
in the progress bar.
controller.
It may take some time for the copying proc-
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
ess to be completed, depending on the
amount of data. If there is not enough mem- troller.
ory space, a message to this effect X Select Manage Media Register.
appears. X Select Rename / Delete Files.
Media

Once the copying procedure is complete, The file list is displayed.


you will hear the first track of the copied X To highlight the selected files: turn and
album. You can now copy more files to the press the controller.
MEDIA REGISTER. X Slide 9 the controller.
XTo cancel copying: select Cancel. You can select between Edit and Delete.
Files are stored in the MEDIA REGISTER up
until the point of cancellation.
i It is possible to change to a different func-
tion (e.g. radio) during the copying proce-
dure. The copying procedure continues in
the background. While the copying proce-
dure is taking place, this is shown by a sym-
bol in the status bar.

Renaming/deleting files X To select Edit for the file: turn and press
the controller.
The following entry field appears:
Media Register 193

X Rename the file. X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
X To save changes with ¬: turn and press The Please Wait... message appears.
the controller. The Data Deleted message then appears.
Renaming a file only changes the name. All files are deleted.
Depending on whether or not the Show or
Track Information option has been X To select No: press the controller.
selected, this change may not be seen in The process is canceled.
the main display field.
X To select Delete for the file: press the con-
troller. Calling up memory space info

Deleting all files


! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not

Media
use COMAND during this time.
This function deletes all files from the MEDIA
REGISTER.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X To select Media: turn and press the con-
troller. X To show the main function bar: slide 5
The menu appears with the available media the controller.
sources. X To select Media: turn and press the con-

X To select the media source: turn the con- troller.


troller and press to confirm. The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
X To select the media source: turn the con-
controller.
troller and press to confirm.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
troller.
controller.
X Select Manage Media Register.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
X Select Delete All Media Files.
troller.
The prompt Would you like to delete
X Select Manage Media Register.
all media files? appears. No is high-
lighted. X Select Memory Info.

Z
194 Bluetooth® audio mode

Selecting a playback mode option is selected, it remains selected after


COMAND is switched on or off.

Bluetooth® audio mode


Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices
Requirements
X Activate the Bluetooth® function in
COMAND (Y page 44).
Bluetooth® audio mode requires a Blue-
The following options are available:
tooth®-capable audio device.
RNormal Track Sequence: the tracks are
Check your Bluetooth® audio device for the
played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3
Media

following (see the manufacturer's operating


etc.).
instructions):
RRandom Medium: all the tracks on the
RBluetooth® audio profile
medium are played in random order.
RRandom Track List: the tracks in the cur- The Bluetooth® audio device must support
rently active track list are played in random the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio
order. profiles.
X To show the main function bar: slide 5 RBluetooth® visibility
the controller. Certain Bluetooth® audio devices do not
X To select Media: turn and press the con- just require activation of the Bluetooth®
troller. function. In addition, your device must be
The menu appears with the available media made "visible" to other devices.
sources. RBluetooth® device name
X To select the media source: turn the con-
This device name is predetermined but can
troller and press to confirm.
usually be changed. For a clear selection of
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
the Bluetooth® device, Mercedes-Benz rec-
controller. ommends that you customize the device
X To select Options: turn and press the con- name.
troller.
i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
X Select Playback Mode.
The options list appears. The # dot indi- Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio
cates the current setting. data transmission
X Select the desired option. AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
The option is switched on. For all options Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio
except Normal Track Sequence, you will data playback.
see a corresponding icon in the main dis- i The Bluetooth® device must be visible for
play. authorization. After authorization,
i The Normal Track Sequence option is COMAND even finds the Bluetooth® device
automatically selected when you change when it is not visible.
the disc you are currently listening to or
when you select a different medium. If an
Bluetooth® audio mode 195

General notes Searching for and authorizing a Blue-


Before using your Bluetooth® audio device tooth® audio device
with COMAND for the first time, you will need Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode
to authorize it.
X To display the main function bar: slide 5
When you authorize a new Bluetooth® audio the controller.
device, it is connected automatically. Con-
X To select Media: turn and press the con-
nection involves first searching for a Blue-
troller.
tooth® audio device and then authorizing it.
The last media source you have set is dis-
You can authorize up to fifteen Bluetooth® played.
devices. X To select Media: slide 5 and press the
i If you authorize a mobile phone that sup- controller.
ports Bluetooth® audio, the A2DP and X To select Bluetooth Audio: turn and
AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles are con- press the controller.

Media
nected automatically. A menu appears.
The mobile phone is then entered: If you see the No Bluetooth Audio
Device Connected message, you will
Rin the Bluetooth® telephone list
need to authorize the Bluetooth® audio
(Y page 115)
device first.
Rin the Bluetooth® device list
X To select Options in the Bluetooth audio
(Y page 195)
menu: slide 6 the controller and press to
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a confirm.
mobile phone in Bluetooth® telephony X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices:
(Y page 116). press the controller.
i If the mobile phone that is connected only A new menu appears.
supports two Bluetooth® profiles at the
same time, COMAND functions may
behave as follows:
Rwhen connecting to the Internet, play-
back is stopped on the Bluetooth® audio
device.
Rwhen starting playback on the Blue-
tooth® audio device, the Internet con-
nection is ended.

: Bluetooth® audio player within range and


already authorized
; Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
tooth® audio mode in range
The Bluetooth® device list displays all author-
ized devices, whether they are within range or
not. After a device search, devices which are
within range but not authorized are also dis-
played.

Z
196 Bluetooth® audio mode

Searching for Bluetooth® audio ates a six-digit code, which is displayed on


both devices that are to be connected
X To select Search for Audio Devices:
press the controller. For some Bluetooth® audio devices, the
A message appears. pairing must be confirmed within 10 sec-
X Select Start Search.
onds.
COMAND searches for Bluetooth® audio X If the number code displayed on COMAND
devices within range and adds them to the and on the Bluetooth® audio device is the
Bluetooth® device list. same, select Yes: press the controller.
The duration of the search depends on the If you select Yes, authorization continues
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within and the Bluetooth® audio device is connec-
range and their characteristics. ted. Playback starts.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices, If you select No, authorization is canceled.
playback must first be started on the device
itself so that COMAND can play the audio
Media

files. Bluetooth® must also be given as a External authorization


media output location for the audio device If COMAND does not find your Bluetooth®
used. audio device, this may be due to particular
Authorizing Bluetooth® audio security settings on your Bluetooth® audio
device. In this case, check whether your Blue-
X Select a Bluetooth® audio device that has
not yet been authorized from the list: turn tooth® audio device can locate COMAND.
and press the controller. The Bluetooth® device name for COMAND is
Authorization starts. MB Bluetooth.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device X Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode
used, you now have two options for con- (Y page 198).
tinuing with authorization. X To select Options: slide 6 and press the

Option 1: entering the passkey controller.


X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices:
X You can find information on this in the
press the controller.
"Authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone"
section (Y page 116). X To select Connect via Audio Device:

After successful authorization, the Blue- turn and press the controller.
tooth® audio device is connected and Authorizing
starts playing.
X Start the authorization on your Bluetooth®
Option 2: Secure Simple Pairing audio device (see the manufacturer's oper-
XYou can find information on this in the ating instructions).
"Authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone" After successful authorization, the Blue-
section (Y page 116). tooth® audio device is connected and
After successful authorization, the Blue- starts playing.
tooth® audio device is connected and With some Bluetooth® audio devices, play-
starts playing. back must first be started on the device itself
i The Bluetooth® audio device must sup- so that COMAND can play the audio files.
port Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connection Device-specific information on authorizing
via Secure Simple Pairing. COMAND cre- and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones can be found on the Internet at
Bluetooth® audio mode 197

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ Option 2:
connect. X To select Options: slide 6 and press the
controller.
X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices:
Reconnecting a Bluetooth® audio
press the controller.
device
X To select a Bluetooth® audio device: turn
The Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected and press the controller.
automatically under the following circum- If the Bluetooth® audio device has been
stances: authorized, playback starts.
Rone of the last two mobile phones to have
been connected has also been used as a
Bluetooth® audio player (if this function is Bluetooth® audio device and simulta-
supported by the mobile phone). neous search for mobile phones
Rthe mobile phone is automatically connec-

Media
i When searching for a mobile phone or a
ted. The Bluetooth® audio player is then new Bluetooth® audio device, the connec-
connected.
tion to an already activated Bluetooth®
i For an automatic connection with audio device is stopped.
COMAND, the telephone must be within
In the Bluetooth® audio basic display , you will
range.
see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con‐
For most Bluetooth® audio devices, the nected message, and the Connect Device
"automatic connection" must be activated menu item cannot be selected.
by ticking a box. Depending on the device
used, this prompt often takes place when
authorizing (see the manufacturer's oper- Displaying details
ating instructions).
X To select a Bluetooth® audio device from
If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con‐
the Bluetooth® device list: turn the control-
nected message appears, you have two ler.
options to reconnect the Bluetooth® audio
X To select the symbol to the right of the
device.
Bluetooth® audio device: slide 9 the
Option 1: controller.
X In the Connect Device basic display: X To select Details: turn and press the con-
press the controller. troller.
If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth® The following information concerning the
audio device, it will be connected and will selected mobile phone is shown:
start playing. RBluetooth® name
RBluetooth® address
RAvailability status (shown after an
update)
RAuthorization status
X To close the detailed display: press the
% button.

Z
198 Bluetooth® audio mode

De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue- A To stop Ë or start Ì playback


tooth® audio device B Name of the connected Bluetooth® audio
device (example)
X To select a Bluetooth® audio device from
C Options menu
the Bluetooth® device list: turn the control-
ler. Some mobile phones only support two Blue-
X To select the symbol to the right of the tooth® profiles at the same time (e.g. Hands-
Bluetooth® audio device: slide 9 and Free Profile for Bluetooth® telephony and
press the controller. Bluetooth® audio profile for audio streaming).
X To select Deauthorize: press the control- If you activate Bluetooth® audio mode and
ler. there is already an active Internet connection,
A prompt appears asking whether you this can cause the connection to be termina-
really wish to deauthorize this device. ted.
XTo select Yes or No: turn and press the con-
Switching to Bluetooth® Audio
Media

troller.
If you select Yes, the device is deleted from X To show the main function bar: slide 5
the Bluetooth® device list. the controller.
If you select No the process is canceled. X To select Media: turn and press the con-

i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth® troller.


audio device, you should also delete the The last media source you have set is dis-
device name MB Bluetooth from your played.
Bluetooth® audio device's Bluetooth® list X To select Media: slide 5 and press the

(see the Bluetooth® audio device's operat- controller.


ing instructions). X To select Bluetooth Audio: turn and
press the controller.
COMAND activates the Bluetooth® audio
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode device. The basic display then appears.
Playback starts.
Basic display
i If the Bluetooth® audio device connected
supports metadata and corresponding data
is available, then the artist, track and album
name can be displayed.

Starting/stopping playback
X To select Start playback Ì: turn and
press the controller.
Playback starts. Ë is selected.
: Audio transmission status (depending on
the Bluetooth® audio device, also title X To stop playback: select Ë.
name and artist) A message appears. Ì is selected.
; Data medium position in the media list X To continue playback: select Ì.
= Sound settings A message appears. Ë is selected.
? Device list
Bluetooth® audio mode 199

Starting playback if the Bluetooth® Some mobile phones impair function with
audio device has been stopped regard to the following criteria:
Rthe number of tracks that can be selected
During the search for mobile phones
(Y page 115), the connection with the Blue- Rthe time period until the next or previous
tooth® audio device is terminated. In the track is played
Bluetooth® audio basic display (Y page 198) X Switch the multifunction steering wheel to
you will see the No Bluetooth Audio the media menu (see the vehicle Operator's
Device Connected message and the Con‐ Manual).
nect Last Used Player menu item cannot X To skip forwards or backwards to a
be selected. track: press the 9 or : button on
When the search is finished, the Bluetooth® the multifunction steering wheel.
audio device can be reconnected. X Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
X To select Start playback: Ì: slide 6 or : button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel until the desired track is reached.

Media
and press the controller.
Playback resumes from the beginning. If you press and hold the 9 or :
buttons, the rapid scrolling speed increa-
XTo select Connect Last Used Player: ses after a short time.
press the controller.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device i In rapid scroll, track names are not
used, playback starts immediately or you shown, but instead only Track1, Track2 etc.
must start playback manually. The playback times for the tracks played
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth are not displayed. This is available as an
Audio Device Paused message. optional function starting with AVRCP Ver-
sion 1.3. There is also no music search
i If there is an Internet connection and the
option available with Bluetooth® Audio.
mobile phone that is connected only sup-
ports two Bluetooth® profiles at the same
time, the Internet connection is interrup- Selecting playback options
ted.
If the Bluetooth® audio device supports the
i The connection to the Bluetooth® audio
corresponding function, the following options
device can also be interrupted if:
are available:
Rthe connected mobile phone only sup- RNormal Track Sequence: the tracks are
ports 2 Bluetooth® profiles at the same played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3
time. etc.).
Ryou connect to the Internet using
Audio data playback is determined by the
COMAND (Y page 153). order in which the tracks are written to the
data medium. Alphabetical order is the
most common. Once all the tracks in a
Selecting a track folder have been played, the tracks in the
The function is not supported by all Blue- next folder are played.
tooth® audio devices. RRandom Track List: the current track list
is played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.).
RRandom Medium: all tracks on the data
medium are played in random order (e.g.
track 3, 8, 5 etc.).

Z
200 Operation with the Media Interface

Playback options are optional functions Media Interface basic display


and are not, or only partially, supported by
Bluetooth® audio devices.
Selecting playback options
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X Select Playback Mode.
A # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the desired option.
If you select Random Track List, you will
see a corresponding message in the display : Main function bar
or selection window. ; Display for the active data medium
= Media menu bar
Media

? Track display on the disc


Increasing the volume using COMAND
A Track number and number of tracks in the
X To select Options: slide 6 and press the track list
controller. B Numerical time display
X To select Volume: turn and press the con- C Graphic time display
troller. D Cover view (if available)
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
X Select Standard or Boost. Switching to Media Interface
Information on sound settings X Connect a data medium to USB socket 1 or
(Y page 210).
USB socket 2 (Y page 184).
X Select the basic menu for Media Interface 1
or Media Interface 2 (Y page 181).
Operation with the Media Interface
If playable media files are found, they will
General notes be played by COMAND.
If you remove a device, the No Device
Media Interface is a universal interface for the
Connected message appears.
connection of mobile audio and video devi-
ces. Media Interface in COMAND has two
USB connections.
Supported devices
Two USB connection sockets and an SD card
slot are located in the stowage compartment The following data media can be connected to
under the armrest. COMAND via the Media Interface:
RiPod®
RiPhone®
RiPad®
RMP3
RUSB devices
Operation with the Media Interface 201

i It is not possible to run two Apple® devi- and hold it until the desired position has
ces simultaneously. Therefore the device been reached.
last connected is loaded.
i iPod®, iPhone® and iPad® are registered
Search function
trademarks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, Cali-
fornia, USA. Selecting Search using media menu bar
i Audio files, photos and video files can be X Slide 6 the controller.
played back. The media menu bar is shown.
For details and a list of supported devices, X To select Search: turn and press the con-
visit our website at http://www.mercedes- troller.
benz-mobile.com/. Then follow the instruc- The category list appears.
tions in the "Media Interface" section.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- Overview

Media
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer The following categories are listed:
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada). RCurrent Tracklist
RFolder
RSelect By Cover
Supported data formats
RKeyword Search
Music mp3, wma, aac RPlaylists
RArtists
Video mpeg, wmv, mov,
avi, mp4 RAlbums
RTrack
Images jpg, jpeg, bmp, png
RGenres
RYear

Selecting a music file RComposers


RVideos
Selecting with the controller
RPhotos
X To display the current track list: press RPodcasts
the controller in the basic display. RAudiobooks
The track list for the active data medium
appears. i The functions are available as soon as the
X To select a track: turn the controller and entire media content has been read and
press to confirm. analyzed.
X To skip forwards or backwards to a If the same device is reconnected with
track: turn the controller in the basic dis- unchanged media content, these functions
play. are available more quickly.
The selected track is played. The audio books and podcasts categories
are only available for Apple® devices.
Fast forward/rewind When connecting Apple® devices, the cat-
egories “Folder”, “Year” and “Photos” are
X With the media source active in the basic not available.
display, slide 8 or 9 the controller

Z
202 Video DVD mode

Video function

X To select a category, e.g. Current Track‐


list: turn and press the controller.
The selection list appears. If playable video files are found, they will be
played by COMAND.
X Select the required track.
X To switch on full-screen mode: press the
Media

controller in the basic display.


X To show the video menu: slide 6 the con-
troller in full-screen mode.
The Media Interface menu bar appears.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X Select Video Settings.

Changing settings (Y page 204).

X Keyword search: using the controller,


enter the characters for the desired search Video DVD mode
term and confirm (Y page 189). Important safety notes
Search results are sorted according to the
available categories, displayed and can G WARNING
then be selected. The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
Playback options radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
X In media mode, slide 6 the controller. Never open the housing. Always have main-
The media menu bar is shown. tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
X To select Options: turn and press the con- fied specialist workshop.
troller.
X To select the desired playback option: turn G WARNING
and press the controller. Handling discs while driving may distract you
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
Additional information on playback options
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
(Y page 185).
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Video DVD mode 203

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph i If you insert a video DVD with a different
(approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers region code, a message to this effect
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) appears.
every second.
i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the
factory. This setting can be changed at an
General notes authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. It is also
possible to play video DVDs with a different
Notes on discs region code, provided that they are pro-
duced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. TV standard. The region code can be
They could peel off and damage COMAND. changed up to five times.
Stickers can cause the disc to bend, which
can result in read errors and disc recogni- Control options
tion problems.
There are four control menus available in

Media
! COMAND is designed to play discs that video DVD mode.
comply with the EN 60908 standard. There-
fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- Most DVDs have their own control menu.
mum thickness of 1.3 mm. The DVD's control menu is operated directly
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that using the controller or DVD functions.
contain data on both sides (DVD on one Control menu and Operation
side and audio data on the other), they can- function
not be ejected and can damage the device.
RDVD's control Operation with the
Only use round discs with a diameter of
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of menu controller
8 cm, even with an adapter. Selection of title,
scene, language,
The variety of data media, burners and burn subtitles ...
software means there is no guarantee that
the system will be able to play discs that you RMenuOptions Operation using the
have copied yourself. Selection of menu bar options,
brightness, con- video settings
DVD playback conditions trast, color, for-
If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or mat
PAL TV standards, they may create picture, RVideo menu In full-screen mode,
sound or other problems during playback. Selection of slide 6 the con-
COMAND is capable of playing back video scene, fast troller
DVDs produced according to the following forward or rewind
standards:
RDVD functions In full-screen mode,
RRegion code 1 or region code 0 (no region
Selection of title, press the controller
code)
scene, language,
RPAL or NTSC standard subtitles ...
You will generally find the relevant details
either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.

Z
204 Video DVD mode

Function restrictions X To show the DVD basic display in full-


screen mode: slide 6 the controller.
Depending on the DVD, certain functions or
The video menu appears.
actions may not function at all. The symbol K
X Press the controller.
appears in the display.
The basic display appears.

Switching on video DVD mode


Menu options
RInsert and eject a disc from the single drive
(Y page 183) X To select options: in full-screen mode,
Further options for switching on: slide 6 the controller.
RUsing the main function bar (Y page 180)
The video menu appears.
X Press the controller.
RUsing the device list (Y page 181)
The DVD basic display appears.
X To select Options in the menu bar: turn
Media

DVD basic display and press the controller.


The Options menu appears.
Skip to time
X To select Skip to Time: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X To set the time: turn the controller.
or
Set the desired time using the number key-
pad.
: Main function bar X To hide the menu: press the % button.
; Main display field
DVD functions
= Media menu bar
X To select DVD Functions: turn and press
The DVD basic display appears once the DVD the controller.
has been inserted. A menu appears (Y page 206).

DVD full-screen mode


Video settings
Once the DVD has been inserted, the disc is
played. The video will first appear in the over- Dynamic image enhancement
view display. The Dynamic Image Enhancement function
X To set full-screen mode: slide 5 the automatically matches Bright., Con‐
controller. trastand Color to the film being played.
The main function bar and menu bar are
hidden. A full-screen symbol will be shown.
X Press the controller.
The full-screen mode appears.
Video DVD mode 205

R4:3
RZoom

X To set the picture format: turn and press


the controller.
The dot before the menu entry shows the
selected format.

DVD's control menu


X To activate or deactivate: check or uncheck Most DVDs have their own control menu
the box in front of Dynamic Image which can be operated using the controller.
Enhancement. Showing the DVD's control menu
X To select Menu from the DVD functions

Media
Manual image enhancement menu: turn and press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is hidden and the
DVD's menu entries (e.g. scenes, language,
trailers) are displayed.
X To select a menu entry: turn and press the
controller.

Video menu

In order to manually adjust the brightness,


contrast and color, the dynamic image
enhancement function must be switched off.
X To select Bright., Contrast or Color:
turn and press the controller.
A sliding menu appears.
X To select the required value: turn the con-
troller. : Type of data medium
X To exit the sliding menu: slide 8 the
; Current title
controller.
= Shows the menu bars for the DVD basic
X To activate/deactivate Automatic Day‐
display
light Adjustment: press the controller. ? Current scene
A Track time
Setting the picture format
The following options are available for the
screen format for the DVD being played:
RAuto
R16:9

Z
206 Video DVD mode

Operating the video menu = Shows the DVD basic display


X To show: in full-screen video mode, slide ? Confirms entry in control menu
6 the controller. A Navigates DVD lists
X To hide: slide 5 the controller. B Jumps to the start of the scene
X To select the next or previous scene: turn C Displays camera perspectives
the controller clockwise/counter-clock- D Shows subtitles
wise. E Selects language
X To fast forward or rewind: slide 9 or F Stop function
8 and hold the controller until the G Pause function
desired position has been reached.
X To hide the video menu: slide 5 the con-
Using the DVD functions
troller.
X To show the menu bars for the DVD basic
Media

display: press the controller.


The video menu is hidden and the DVD
basic menu appears.

DVD functions
Showing/hiding the DVD functions
X To show DVD functions: in full-screen X In full-screen mode, press the controller
video mode, press the controller. The DVD functions menu is shown.
The DVD functions menu is shown. It is possible to navigate in the DVD's con-
X To hide: in DVD functions select %: turn trol menu when the arrows in the upper
and press the controller menu bar are activated.
X To select the XZ¬Y arrow to navigate in the
X To show the DVD basic display: select
menu: turn the controller.
ò from the DVD functions: turn and
The active arrow is highlighted.
press the controller.
X To select a menu entry: press the control-
ler.
Overview of DVD functions
The next menu entry in the direction of the
arrow is highlighted.
X To call up a highlighted menu entry: turn the
controller until OK is highlighted.
X Press the controller.
The selected DVD scene is played.
X To hide DVD functions: select & using the
controller.
X Press the controller.
The DVD functions are hidden.
: Activates DVD control menu If there are functions such as Display cam-
; Hides DVD functions era perspectives on the DVD, these are
shown in the DVD functions menu.
Picture viewer 207

X To call up Display camera perspectives: Picture viewer


turn and press the controller
General notes
Stop function If there are pictures on the active data
medium, you can view them on the COMAND
X Show the DVD functions (Y page 206).
display.
X Interrupting playback
The following data media and picture formats
To select É from the DVD functions are supported:
menu: turn and press the controller.
RData media: MEDIA REGISTER, CD, DVD,
The Ë display changes to Ì. The
video image is hidden. USB devices, SD memory cards
X To continue playback: select Ì. R Picture formats: jpeg, jpg, bmp, png

Playback continues from the point where it The maximum image resolution is 20 mega-
was interrupted. pixels
It is not possible to view a picture from the

Media
X To stop playback: select É again while
driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.
playback is interrupted.
X To start playback again: select Ì.
Playback restarts from the beginning. Displaying pictures

Pause function
X Show the DVD functions (Y page 206).
X Pausing playback
To select Ë: turn and press the control-
ler.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: select Ì.

X In media mode, slide 6 the controller.


Selecting a scene/chapter
The media menu bar is shown.
If the film is divided into scenes and chapters, X To select Search: turn and press the con-
you can select these directly while the film is troller.
running or you can skip progressively through The category list appears.
them. This is not possible at certain points for X To select Photos: turn and press the con-
some DVDs (e.g. during the opening credits). troller.
It may also be possible to select the scene A directory list appears. Folders and picture
and chapter from the functions stored on the files can be shown.
DVD. X Select a folder or picture.
X To skip forwards or back: in the video If there is no picture on the data medium,
menu, turn the controller. an empty list is shown.
The next or previous scene in the film is You can search for pictures on other data
skipped to. media.
i The DVD functions can also be used to
make selections (Y page 206).

Z
208 Picture viewer

Searching for pictures on other data Changing the picture view


media
X In the directory list, slide 8 the control-
ler.
The device list appears.

X Press the controller.


The image menu appears.
To select Turn Clockwise: turn and press
Media

X
the controller.
Example: the directory list displays the existing The picture rotates 90 degrees.
picture files
X To select a data medium with picture files: X Select Turn Counterclockwise.
turn the controller and press to confirm. The picture rotates 90 degrees.
A directory list appears. Folders and picture X Select Zoom In.
files can be shown. The size of the picture increases.
X Select a folder or picture. After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X To move the section of the picture: slide
Starting a slide show 4 and 1 the controller.
X While viewing a picture, press the control- X To revert to the original size: press the con-
ler. troller
The image menu appears. or
X To select Start Slideshow: turn and
X Press the % button.
press the controller.
The slide show starts.
X To end the slide show: press the controller.
Closing the picture viewer
The image menu appears.
X Select End Slide Show.
X Press the controller.
The menu appears.
X To select Close Picture Viewer: turn
and press the controller.
COMAND returns to the last accessed
media function.
209

Your COMAND equipment ................ 210


Sound settings .................................. 210
Burmester® surround sound sys-
tem ..................................................... 211
Burmester® high-end surround
sound system .................................... 212

Sound
210 Sound settings

Your COMAND equipment Setting treble, mid-range and bass

i These operating instructions describe all


the standard and optional equipment of
your COMAND system, as available at the
time of going to print. Country-specific dif-
ferences are possible. Bear in mind that
your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety-
relevant systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops in the vehicle Operator's X Call up the sound menu (Y page 210).
Manual. X Turn the controller until Equalizer is
brought to the front.
X To activate rotary menus for treble, mid-
Sound settings
range and bass: slide 6 the controller.
Sound

Calling up the sound menu X To switch between the rotary menus: slide

You can make various sound settings for the 8 or 9 the controller.
different audio and video sources. It is possi- X To make the desired Equalizer settings:
ble to set more bass for radio mode than for turn the controller.
CD audio mode, for example. The respective Rotary menus show the set values.
sound menu can be called up from the menu X To return to the menu: slide 5 the con-
of the desired mode. troller.
X Switch to radio mode (Y page 168). X To return to the basic menu: press the %
or button briefly.
X Switch to media mode (Y page 180).
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller. Setting the balance
X To select à: turn and press the control-
ler.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Equalizer.
Sound menu overview
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance Adjusts the volume: Balance adjusts the volume left and right. For
left/right the best sound, setting 0 is recommended.
X Call up the sound menu (Y page 210).
X Turn the controller until Balance is brought
to the front and then slide 6 the control-
ler.
Burmester® surround sound system 211

X To activate the menu for balance: press the X Switch to radio mode (Y page 168).
controller. or
X To adjust the balance: slide 8 or 9 X Switch to media mode (Y page 180).
the controller. X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
An image shows the sound focus set. controller.
X To exit the menu: press the % button.
X To select à: turn and press the control-
ler.
The menu appears with the last setting
Burmester® surround sound system accessed, e.g. Equalizer.
General notes Overview of Burmester® surround sound sys-
tem
The Burmester® surround sound system has
a total output of 640 watts and is equipped Function Options
with 10 loudspeakers.
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
The Burmester® surround sound system is
range and bass
available for all functions in the radio and

Sound
media modes. Balance Adjusts the volume:
The following modes are available for the left/right
Burmester® surround sound system: Surround Optimizes spatial
RRadio composition for all
RSatelliteradio seats
RAudio CD
RAudio DVD (MLP, PCM DTS® and Dolby®
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
Digital audio formats)
RVideo DVD (PCM, DTS® and Dolby® Digital
audio formats)
RMP3/AAC
RMedia Interface
RBluetooth® audio mode

i For the best sound, CD or WAV CD format


is recommended. For data-reduced media,
AAC with a data rate of 320 kbit/s is rec-
ommended.
X Call up the sound menu (Y page 211).
X Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the
Calling up the sound menu center.
You can make various sound settings for the X Slide 6 the controller.
different audio and video sources. It is possi- The rotary menus for treble, mid-range and
ble to set more bass for radio mode than for bass are activated.
CD audio mode, for example. The respective X To switch between the rotary menus: slide
sound menu is called up from the menu of the 8 or 9 the controller.
desired mode.
212 Burmester® high-end surround sound system

X To make the desired Equalizer settings: The Surround setting enables a wide-ranging
turn the controller. sound playback.
The rotary menus show the set values. X Call up the sound menu (Y page 211).
X To return to the menu: slide 5 the con- X Turn the controller until Surround is in the
troller. center.
X To return to the basic menu: press the % X Slide 6 the controller.
button briefly. The left-hand rotary menu to switch sur-
round sound on and off is activated.
X To activate Surround: turn the controller
Setting the balance until ON is active.
X To exit the menu: press the % button.

Burmester® high-end surround sound


system
Sound

General notes
The Burmester® high-end surround sound
system has a total output of 1000 watts and is
equipped with 11 loudspeakers.
Balance adjusts the volume left and right. For
the best sound, setting 0 is recommended. The Burmester® high-end surround sound
system is available for all functions in the
X Call up the sound menu (Y page 211).
radio and media modes.
X Turn the controller until Balance is brought
The following modes are available for the
to the front and then slide 6 the control-
Burmester® high-end surround sound sys-
ler.
tem:
X To activate the menu for balance: press the
RRadio
controller.
RSatelliteradio
X To adjust the balance: slide 8 or 9
the controller. RAudio CD
An image shows the sound focus set. RAudio DVD (MLP, PCM DTS® and Dolby®
X To exit the menu: press the % button. Digital audio formats)
RVideo DVD (PCM, DTS® and Dolby® Digital
audio formats)
Setting surround sound RMP3/AAC
RMedia Interface
RBluetooth® audio mode

i For the best sound, CD or WAV CD format


is recommended. For data-reduced media,
AAC with a data rate of 320 kbit/s is rec-
ommended.
Burmester® high-end surround sound system 213

Calling up the sound menu Setting treble, mid-range and bass


You can select various sound settings while in
radio mode or another media mode. It is pos-
sible to set more bass for radio mode than for
audio CD mode, for example. The respective
sound menu can be called up from the menu
bar of the desired mode.
X Switch to radio mode (Y page 168).
or
X Switch to media mode (Y page 180).
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
X Call up the sound menu (Y page 213).
controller.
X To select à: turn and press the control-
X Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the
center.
ler.
X Slide 6 the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Sound Profile. Rotary menus for treble, mid-range and

Sound
bass are activated.
Overview of Burmester® high-end surround X To switch between the rotary menus: slide
sound system 8 or 9 the controller.
Function Options X To make the desired Equalizer settings:
turn the controller.
Equalizer Sets treble, mid- Rotary menus show the set values.
range and bass
X To return to the menu: slide 5 the con-
Balance Adjusts the volume: troller.
left/right X To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
VIP & BAL selection Optimizes sound
playback for individ-
ual seats
Setting the balance
Sound profile Four defined sound
settings: PURE/
EASY LISTENING/
LIVE/SURROUND

Balance adjusts the volume left and right. For


the best sound, setting 0 is recommended.
X Call up the sound menu (Y page 213).
X Turn the controller until Balance is in the
center and slide 6.
214 Burmester® high-end surround sound system

X To activate the menu for balance: press the Sound profile for Description
controller. high-end sound
X To adjust the balance: slide 8 or 9 system
the controller.
An image shows the sound focus set. Pure Audiophile audio
X To exit the menu: press the % button.
playback without
additional effects
Easy Listening Subtly mellowed
VIP & BAL selection acoustics for laid-
back listening over
long periods
Live Spectacular sound
settings with live-
performance char-
acteristics
Surround Enhanced surround
Sound

sound for mono and


stereo recordings
For the best sound, the specific seats will
need to be set.
X Call up the sound menu (Y page 213).
X Turn the controller until VIP & BAL
Selection is in the center and slide 6.
X To set the desired VIP & BAL Selection:
turn the controller.
The segment, text and image show the
selected setting.
X To return to the menu: slide 5 the con-
troller. X Call up the sound menu (Y page 213).
X To return to the basic menu: press the % X Turn the controller until Sound Profile is
button briefly. in the center.
X Slide 6 the controller.
The rotary menu to select the sound profile
Setting the sound profile is activated.
With the Sound Profile setting, you can X To select Sound Profile: turn the con-
select between five defined sound settings. troller until the desired sound profile is acti-
vated.
X To return to the menu: slide 5 the con-
troller.
X To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
215

Your COMAND equipment ................ 216


Weather forecasts ............................ 216

SIRIUS Weather
216 Weather forecasts

Your COMAND equipment Depending on which scale has been selected,


the weather map can display the following
These operating instructions describe all the weather data with symbols:
standard and optional equipment for your Rrain radar
COMAND system, as available at the time of Rstorm characteristics
going to print. Country-specific differences
Rhigh and low-pressure areas, weather
are possible. Please note that your COMAND
fronts
system may not be equipped with all the fea-
Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
tures described.
typhoons)
Rgale warnings
Weather forecasts Rwind direction and speeds

Introduction i The rain radar cannot be displayed for


Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
This function is currently not available for
SIRIUS Weather

Canada. i Hurricane: term used to describe the trop-


For the reception of weather forecasts via ical cyclones that primarily develop in the
satellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Sat- Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific
ellite Weather subscription. oceans. The wind speeds are above 74 mph
If the message: Call SIRIUS to activate (118 km/h). Five categories are used to
system at: 888-539-7474 ESN: classify the strength of a hurricane.
SIRIUS ID appears along with the ID number Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical
of the SIRIUS device, you will need to have the cyclone that develops in the northwestern
weather service activated first. Pacific. The wind speeds are in the category
X To select Call or Cancel: turn and press
of a hurricane.
the controller.
If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND
Switching the SIRIUS Weather display
(Y page 114), the call will connect to a SIR-
on/off
IUS service employee after selecting Call.
The ID number of the SIRIUS device will be Activating
transferred to the telephone display.
X This will be followed by instructions from
the service employee.
COMAND can receive weather forecasts via
satellite radio for the entire USA (including
Alaska and Hawaii).
The received weather data can be displayed
as an information chart (daily forecast, five-
day forecast, detailed information) or on the
weather map.
The weather data received from a weather X To show the main function bar: slide 5
station is stored in COMAND for one hour. It the controller.
can therefore be displayed again immediately X To select ®: turn and press the controller.
after restarting the engine (for example after The menu for selecting internet applica-
refueling). tions appears.
Weather forecasts 217

X To select SIRIUS Weather: turn and press Deactivating


the controller.
X Press %.
The information chart shows the daily fore-
cast at the current vehicle position.
You see the following information: Displaying detailed information
Rthe date and time of the weather message
received last
Rinformation on the current weather (tem-
perature, cloud cover) and forecast for the
next 3, 6, 12 hours
Rthe current highest temperature and fore-
casts
Rthe current lowest temperature and fore-
casts

SIRIUS Weather
Rthe probability of rain

Switching to the 5-day forecast: Besides the current temperatures, you can
display information such as wind speeds and
X To select Current: turn and press the con- UV index.
troller.
X To select Current or 5-Day in the current-
A menu appears.
day or 5-day forecast: turn and press the
X Select 5-Day.
controller.
The information chart displays the forecast
A menu appears.
for the next five days in the currently selec-
X Select Info.
ted location.
The information chart shows detailed infor-
mation for the selected area.

Selecting the area for the weather


forecast
Introduction
You can select the weather forecasts for:
Rthe current vehicle position
Rvicinity of the destination
Returning to the current-day forecast:
Ra winter sports area
X To select 5-Day: turn and press the con-
Ran area within the USA
troller.
A menu appears. You can select a location in the information
X Select Current. chart (option 1) or in the map (option 2). You
The information chart shows the forecast can store frequently selected locations in the
for the current day again. memory (Y page 219).
i COMAND receives the data for the
weather forecasts from the nearest
weather station to the selected location.
218 Weather forecasts

Option 1: selecting the area in the infor-


mation chart
X To select Position in the information
chart: turn and press the controller.
X To select the current vehicle position:
select Current Position from the menu.
COMAND receives the weather data for the
current vehicle position from the nearest
weather station and displays it automati-
cally.
The information chart shows the following
Requirement for "Near destination": a route information (if available):
to a destination has been calculated
Rski slopes/ski lifts
(Y page 65). The menu item is otherwise
grayed out. Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening
SIRIUS Weather

X To select the vicinity of the destination: Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth)

select Near Destination from the menu: Rtemperature


turn the controller and press to confirm. The status of a facility is indicated as follows:
Rgreen tick - open
Rredcross - closed
Rquestion mark - not known

X To select a winter sports area: select At


Ski Area from the menu: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X Select a state, e.g. Colorado.
Example: city list with character bar
X Select a winter sports area from the menu.
Entry limitation: searching for a location using
The weather data and other information is the character bar is not possible while driving.
displayed for the winter sports area that
X To search for a location: select Search
has been selected. The data is supplied by
the nearest weather station. Areas: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
X Select Other States (U.S.) or At Cur‐
rent State/Province.
Depending on the selection, the list of
states or cities will appear with the charac-
ter bar. You can limit the search using the
character bar.
Weather forecasts 219

X To select state/province or city: enter the X Select a preset using the controller.
first few letters by turning and pressing the X Press and hold the controller until you hear
controller. a tone.
X To switch to the list without the character The area is entered on the selected preset.
bar: slide 5 or select ok.
X To delete an entry: select 2 in the char- Selecting an area from the weather
acter bar and press the controller. memory
Pressing briefly deletes the last letter
X Directly from the weather memory:
entered.
select Position from the information
Pressing and holding longer deletes the chart: turn and press the controller.
entire entry.
X Select Presets.
X To select the state/province or city from
X Select the memory position which contains
the list: turn and press the controller.
After selecting a state (or province) the list the location you require.
The weather data for the selected area is

SIRIUS Weather
of locations appears.
displayed.
After selecting a location, the information
chart displays the weather forecast for the
selected location. The data is supplied by
Weather map
the nearest weather station.
Calling up the weather map
Option 2: selecting the area in the
weather map
X Call up the weather map (Y page 219).
X Move the weather map so that the cross-
hair is over the desired area (Y page 219).
X Press the controller.
The information chart shows the weather
forecast for the selected area. The data is
supplied by the nearest weather station.

X To select Map in the information chart: turn


Memory functions and press the controller.
The weather map is shown on a 500-mi
Storing the area in the weather memory (500-km) scale. The crosshair highlights
You can save locations that are called up fre- the weather station that supplies the cur-
quently in ten preset positions (0, 1-9) in the rent weather data.
weather memory.
X In the weather memory: select the area
Moving the weather map
for the weather forecast (Y page 217). X Slide 4 or 1 the controller.
The selected location appears at the top in The weather map moves in the correspond-
the status bar. ing direction under the crosshair.
X To select Position in the information
chart: turn and press the controller.
X Select Presets.
220 Weather forecasts

Changing the scale Explanation of the layers on the


weather map
X Turn the controller.
The scale bar appears. RMenu item Radar Map
X Turn until the desired scale is set. Displays the rain radar as a colored area in
all map scales. For an explanation of the
Showing/hiding the menu in the colors, see the legend (Y page 223).
weather map RMenu item Storm Characteristics

X To show: press the controller. Displays the characteristics of a storm in all


map scales:
X To hide: slide 5 the controller.
- tornadic storm:
storm cell with strong winds (super cell),
Selecting a weather station in the map from which a tornado can develop. Tor-
X Move the weather map and crosshair to the nadoes are also known as twisters.
desired position (Y page 219).
SIRIUS Weather

- cyclone:
X To show the menu: press the controller. storm cells from which a tornadic storm
X To select Weather Table: press the con- can develop
troller. - hailstorm
COMAND receives the weather data for the - the likelihood of a hailstorm
selected position from the nearest weather RStorm watch areas
station and displays it automatically as a
daily forecast. Shows areas for which storm advisories
have been issued (red areas). It is shown in
map scales 50 mi (50 km), 200 mi (200 km)
Switching layers on the map on/off and 500 mi (500 km).
RMenu item Atmospheric pressure
Shows the position of high and low-pres-
sure areas (H, L), weather fronts and iso-
bars It is shown in map scales 200 mi
(200 km) and 500 mi (500 km).
RMenu item Tropical Storm Tracking
Shows the direction and speed of propaga-
tion (track) of a tropical storm in all map
scales with information on times and inten-
sity.
You can switch on different layers, for exam- RMenu item Winds
ple to display the rain radar, weather fronts
Shows the wind direction and wind speed in
and the course of tropical storms on the map.
map scale of 5 mi (5 km).
X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 220).
X To select View: turn and press the control-
ler.
X Select a layer.
Switch the display on O or off ª.
Weather forecasts 221

Sample displays of weather data in the


map

Displaying weather fronts:


X Activate the Atmospheric Pressure dis-
Displaying the rain radar: play level (Y page 220).
If weather data is available, the weather
X Activate the Radar Map display level

SIRIUS Weather
map will then display the weather fronts.
(Y page 220).
The rain radar image is then displayed if The example shows the position of high and
weather data is available. low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts
and isobars. Isobars are lines that show
i You can call up the legend for the precip- where the air pressure is the same.
itation radar (Y page 223). Legend: weather fronts
The transparency of the precipitation radar
map display level can be adjusted in five Weather Explanation
stages. front
Displaying storm characteristics: Cold front If a cold front moves in, the
X Activate the Storm Characteristics dis- (blue line weather remains changea-
play level (Y page 220). with blue tri- ble and there are often rain
If weather data is available, the weather angles) showers and thunder-
map will then display the storm character- storms. The air tempera-
istics. ture decreases.
You can call up the legend for storms Warm front A warm front may cause
(Y page 223). (red line with more prolonged steady
The following information on a storm cell is red semi-cir- rain, more cloud cover and
displayed (if available): cles) a slow rise in temperature.
Rcharacteristics of the storm cell
Rdate and time of observation (time
stamp)
Rdirectional movement speed and path
Propagation speed: the speed at which the
storm cell is advancing.
222 Weather forecasts

Weather Explanation
front
Stationary The weather front moves
front minimally. The weather
(red and blue remains changeable in this
line with red area.
semi-circles
and blue tri-
angles)
Occlusion When the faster cold front You can find out detailed information on a
catches up and joins the cyclone in the Storm Guide (Y page 224).
(purple line
with purple warm front ahead of it, an Showing detailed information (if available):
semi-circles occluded front is formed. Rname of the tropical storm and category
SIRIUS Weather

and trian- The weather remains Rtime stamp


gles) changeable and rainy
Rdirectional movement speed and path
within an occlusion.
Rmaximum wind speed
Propagation speed: the speed at which the
storm cell of a tropical cyclone is advancing.
A tropical storm is separated into different
categories according to the location at which
it develops.
Region of origin Category
Atlantic, North Tropical low pres‐
and South sure system
Pacific Oceans
Displaying the track of a storm: Atlantic, North Tropical Depression
X Activate the Tropical Storm Tracking and South
display level (Y page 220). Pacific Oceans
If weather data is available, the weather Atlantic, North Name of tropical storm
map will then display the track of the storm. and South (Tropical Storm)
Example: in the middle of the map you can Pacific Oceans
see the current position of the tropical low-
pressure area (cyclone). To the right of this Atlantic, North Name of tropical storm
a solid line shows the previous path with and South (Hurricane Cate‐
positions and times. The forecast for the Pacific Oceans gory 3)
direction of propagation is shown by a dot- Displays hurricane cat-
ted line with positions and times. egories 1 through 5
Northwestern Tropical Low
Pacific Ocean Press. Sys.
Northwestern Name of tropical storm
Pacific Ocean (Tropical Cyclone)
Weather forecasts 223

Region of origin Category Time stamp


The time stamp shows when the weather data
Northwestern Name of tropical storm
was created by the weather station.
Pacific Ocean (Typhoon)
A time stamp corresponds to the time at the
Northwestern Name of tropical storm vehicle's current position. The changeover
Pacific Ocean (Super-Typhoon) from summer time to standard time is per-
formed automatically.
You can also see the time stamp for the X Display the menu on the weather map
weather data on map scales of 50 miles and (Y page 220).
smaller. X To select View: turn and press the control-
The weather map shows wind directions and ler.
wind speeds. X Select Time Stamp.

Legend (precipitation radar and storms)


Changing to the information chart

SIRIUS Weather
X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 220).
X To select Weather Table: turn and press
the controller.

Storm watch areas

X Display the menu on the weather map


(Y page 220).
X To select View: turn and press the control-
ler.
X Select Legend.

i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also


valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).
Storm watch areas for which there are storm
Precipita- Color scale advisories are displayed as red areas on the
tion type weather map.
Rain Eleven shades from light (light Activating/deactivating the display of areas
green) to heavy (red) in red:
Mixed Light (light violet) to heavy X Display the menu on the weather map
(violet) (Y page 220).
X To select View: turn and press the control-
Snow Light (light turquoise) to ler.
heavy (turquoise) The list of display levels appears.
224 Weather forecasts

X Select Storm Watch. Showing storm details:


X Select Show Symbols for Storm Areas X Select Details.
On Map. You see detailed information about the
Depending on the previous setting, activate selected storm.
O or deactivate ª the display of areas in
red.
Activating/deactivating the automatic dis-
play of warning popups:
X Select Display Storm Watch Automat‐
ically.
Depending on the previous setting, activate
O or deactivate ª the automatic display
of warning popups.
Setting the radius for the popups:
SIRIUS Weather

X Select 5 miles (5 km), 50 miles (50 km)


or 200 miles (200 km).

Storm overview

Displaying the Storm Guide:


X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 220).
X To select Guide: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears. The current storm is high-
lighted. There is information about the
storm in the status bar.
X To select Next: turn and press the control-
ler.
The next storm is marked.
X Select Previous.
The previous storm is highlighted.

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi